Home

ZyXEL GS-4012F/4024 User's Manual

1. sssssssss 113 Table 31 Part Authentication BD TX ssai d ke pp rexUEE HER xA EEE iaia EE FR Sb LEO rd 117 Table 32 Port Authentication RADIUS 2e rieberet ep p HaT IAS ER PUR i da A EPI ee Epp ERR e SG 118 Toe PR ug M c 121 TREN SA ESL ee TM TTE 123 Tabla 35 Classifier Summary Table 1 cecsccsecec ertt ee oerte ee rrr eerte rta 125 Table 36 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number sss 125 Table of Common mt S 126 E R cal l n 130 List of Tables 26 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 29 Polio Summary Table iussisset de perti reto a Pert ERR opes ee enda 131 Table 40 Physical Queue Priority iuuiuusecei ictus torta rtp gta La ERR ECL adt Let ERR ELE Cid cct 134 I raEeit UnBn u dM 136 TOSS VLAN Tag FII caaitaw scission e cda ba AERA AR eon aaa 139 Table 43 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format ssss 140 B LL 902 1 Fame m e 140 Table 45 VLAN Slacking uiiseseuictus saxa in ci paura t babar tiia KERE DR ERA etia np DUUM sa PA d Maa 141 Hc EUN Ue MCI CERTE TTL 145 Tabte 47 Mulucast SPI aussen Dada dex ciun Dinan doi en Mod d a cx ats 146 Table 48 Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile 148 Table 49 Multicast Setting MVR 2iususiccceis serere phrase eee etre o rt bepr eere Ie E pe pE ca 151 Table 50 Multicast Setting MVR Group Configuration eessen 152 Valle ucc rest 156 B
2. 134 20 1 1 Strict Priority Queuing SPQ uersa doi ER eb a adi e Lipa eda 134 20 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR sees 135 20 2 Coniguring GUNS 135 Chapter 21 NEAN STS NG IG iei cteivii acd tadatvncisescsbdassauvsstadusstavendendsiiasesassiadsdaaiaddnisineisianmasiies 138 Zii NOU OO Ieper ene eer enya DRE ede bi d IVE edat Cre Ade Up rie uide 138 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example 122 csecci ecrit tuti titt da 138 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port POS ceto retta pentax nt Fed nb nd ar nbn E Ru dd 139 Pale a ds D ge iil E o rer A A EY 139 zidi Famo aS 1 eU TS 140 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking sicicciuis eerte ke n rta ax tont ka adn ib dado 141 Chapter 22 I d 144 22 11 IM UT UecESDII P H 144 eaae ibt a 144 VEA Egg ise UE 144 Crubatti deci qe HQ 145 EUM NT rto s PTS 145 22 2 2 IGMEFItetpe Profile occa cuiisen iudei dbb r stent bnt ibi cra Le ripae 147 225 Topesor MVE PORSC 15i epa uec sene cei e Rte aoe 149 22 ka NYRE NOTOS oriras NR 149 2AA HOW MYR WOKS T 149 22 4 General MVR Configurator 22e barata tte t Share hk ER Fanart RR renaire E ata 150 2505 1 MYR C niiguration Example necis orte rivR PS eT EPE MPH AME RH EPI EEopO USE MR RAN 153 Chapter 23 Static Roe ii nci oii ie iiec Pain dri Re D CERA HR ERR 156 emper a 156
3. LABEL DESCRIPTION 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to stop port statistic polling Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 70 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 71 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current tim
4. Default Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Gateway Primary Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the Secondary DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask DNS Server Add Click Add to insert the settings as a new entry in the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configurations Clear Click Clear to reset the fields back to the factory defaults VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server for the DHCP mode DHCP Status This field displays the starting and the size of DHCP client IP address Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Chapter 30 DHCP 186 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 30 3 1 DHCP Server Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the switch is used to assign network information to the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales network Figure 96 DHCP Server Network Example E im 4 In the DHCP Server screen configure two DHCP client IP address pools for the two networks The following shows an example Figure 97 DHCP Server Configuration Example ED DHCP Server ng Status VID 2 Client IP Pool Starting Address 92168 2100 Size of Client IP Pool 100 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 5236821
5. sales zyxel co uk 44 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK is the prefix number you enter to make an international telephone call Customer Support GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table of Contents Porn ee m 2 Interference Statements and Warnings eeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 3 ZYXEL Limited Warranty assoni e a a aaan aei aia 5 Customer SUDDOIT siiip a eA uS D dEE Lig EAM D GUE 6 IE CXegEeenclcsmteee e 8 ESEMPIO D T LUST 20 List ELGDICee t 26 dir T H M 30 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your SWItch ccccccccececeee cece ents eens eee eeeeeeee eee seesseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeees 32 Wad RINT EE N T E O ora Co bu CUR RON LES Ga bI E RR Pu T bua RASRH AI E ev EAE E 32 pcne cuui Re 32 13 Hardware Features uoce etna I aa a aa aa ea a 35 TA sepeui Aet 36 14 1 Bachbbonp ADDICION uiii cierta ERRPRREEREPE HIER TRE C EpL EE ER OE Sort 36 Taa Endang Example saoiread Ebo ei a Erde tin Kat P aA RUE EE A SEEEN ET EENES 37 1 4 3 High Performance Switching Example 2 ciet rr rnt rro 37 1 4 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples sess 38 14 4 1 Tag pased VLAN Example uera PLI dI EP Ce an ERR DE Fdo ache bet den De Y ana 38 1 4 4 2 VLAN
6. Clears the MAC address table 243 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 94 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION port num Removes all learned MAC address on the specified port s no logging Disables syslog logging ping lt IP host name gt Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device vlan lt vlan id gt Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device in the specified VLAN s reload config lt index gt Restarts the system and use the specified configuration file show classifier Displays all classifier related information name Displays the specified classifier related information cluster Displays cluster management status candidates Displays cluster candidate information member Displays the MAC address of the cluster member s members config Displays the configuration of the cluster member s member mac mac addr Displays the status of the cluster member s dhcp relay Displays DHCP relay settings Server Displays DHCP server settings server vlnd id Displays DHCP server settings in a specified VLAN diffserv Displays general DiffServ settings garp Displays GARP information hardware monitor C F Displays current hardware monitor information with the specified temp
7. ras config no mirror port 41 7 2 no https timeout Syntax no https timeout Resets the https session timeout to default An example is shown next The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds Figure 174 no https timeout Command Example ras config no https timeout Cache timeout 300 Chapter 41 Command Examples 276 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 7 3 no trunk Syntax no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 lacp no trunk T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 interface port list where T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Disables the trunk group T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 lacp Disables LACP in the trunk group T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Removes ports from the trunk group interface port list An example is shown next Disable trunk one T1 Disable LAPC on trunk three T3 Remove ports one three four and five from trunk five T5 Figure 175 no trunk Command Example ras config 4 no trunk T1 ras config no trunk T3 lacp ras config no trunk T5 interface 1 3 5 41 7 4 no port access authenticator Syntax no port access authenticator no port access authenticator lt port list gt reauthenticate no port access authenticator lt port list gt where Disables port authentication on the switch lt port list gt Disables the re authentication mechanism on the listed port s reauthenticate lt port list gt
8. name Area ID 0 0 0 0 Authentication None Stub Network rH No Summary O Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Authentication Stub Network Area ID Index Name Delete Cancel Delete The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 58 OSPF Configuration Area Setup uniquely identifies an area create only one backbone area on the switch LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Enter a 32 bit ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that A value of 0 0 0 0 indicates that this is a backbone also known as Area 0 You can Chapter 25 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 58 OSPF Configuration Area Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Select an authentication method Simple or MD5 to activate authentication Select None to disable authentication Interface s and virtual interface s must use the same authentication method as the associated area Stub Area Select this option to set the area as a stub area If you enter 0 0 0 0 in the Area ID field the settings in the Stub Area fields are ignored No Summary Select this option to set the switch to not send receive LSAs Default Route Cost Specify a cost between 0 and 16777214 used to add a default route into a stub area
9. ssssse n 154 Figure 73 MVR Group Configuration Example eese 154 Foue TOE ROU MP VE 156 FOWE RIP siaaa aS 159 Figure 7o OSPF Network EXample 2 iciiccccicsserecesseceurtaterseuareessaeuretescazeurteinaatuaveensing 161 Fowo FF OSPF ONUS aan TE 162 Figure 78 OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings 164 Figure 79 OSPF Configuration Area Setup 4 5 n rte ean rh rbd ean is 165 Figure 80 OSPF Configuration Summary Table see 166 giam iine T 167 21 List of Figures GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Foue S2 OSPF VNUar uo V 169 dp sg ptor E MEE 172 Figure 94 How DVMRE WORKS 1 scuccisideex endete ei eode anaa aarin A poudre ha 175 Figete 3o OVW eet cm EET 175 Figure 95 DVMRP IGMPIRIP Not Set EMO ise tria be Ere REF FEES EeRb e br n GE FE H EUR 178 Figure 87 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error 176 Figure 88 DVMRP Duplicate VID Error Message c cccccceececceeeseeeteeeneeeeene 177 Figure S9 IP RDI ataa 178 Figure 90 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field eeeeseeeeeeeeeess 180 Figure 91 DiffSorv Network Example 1 esee detur tatg hao ttn innia a 181 Figure 92 DINGO 181 Figure 93 D lServ DSCP Seling ctae abb Id ISP P si RRR FX SR ERE RA Hr enr prd 182 Figure 94 DHCP DHCP Server Status iuusstersesdkkrturtgkbHEE TeAEEFERUSU UP EKIT SM RRERFRU E
10. Q Q O DDO D OD O OD D00DOOO Q Q 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 42 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 43 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connection The figure below shows the front panel of the switch nnobDnoDoDnoD m poate Figure 9 Front Panel GS 4024 aaa EF uu vvv www rim im im im E Front Panel GS 4012F a ip ig Mis Fen E men eo E m ii E p The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1 Front Panel PORT DESCRIPTION 100 1000 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Gigabit Ethernet Ports Mini GBIC Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optical connections to backbone slots Ethernet switches see Section 3 1 3 on page 45 for instructions Gigabit mini Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet GBIC ports switches or use them to daisy chain other switches Alternatively use mini GBIC transceiver
11. You are connected to a site pretending to be G5 4024 00a0c5012345 possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate For the purpose of identifying the Web site GS 4024 00a0c5012345 Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site c e Chapter 33 Access Control 214 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 134 Security Certificate 2 Netscape Security Error Domain Name Mismatch x You have attempted to establish a connection with 192 168 1 1 However the security certificate presented belongs to G5 4024 00a0c5012345 It is possible though unlikely that someone may be trying to intercept your communication with this web site If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help 33 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection 215 Chapter 33 Access Control GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 1
12. essen 242 Table 94 Command Summary Enable Mode eee 243 Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode sees 247 Table 96 interface port channel Commands eseeeeeeeeeseenn 261 Table 97 interface route domain Commands eese eene tenentes 264 Table 98 Command Summary config vlan Commands s sssessss 265 Table 99 Command Summary myr Commands eee 266 Table 100 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch ecceeseceeeceeeeeeeeteees 298 Table 101 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch seeeesee 298 Table 102 Troubleshooting the Password esser enun ere PR XR RER PIY4 URN Ke PA DXRRQRR EE PREGA 306 Table 103 General Product SpecifiGallOriS cresce ert omnee tert edu ee ep teta PERO a co ene pda n 308 Table 104 Management Specifications eeeseeeseeeseeeeeea sena th kann nan tha ana 309 Table 105 Physical and Environmental Specifications ssssssssssss 310 Table 108 Classes of IP Addlessee uis eto n Lee Feat ra erede rore ba Ys 312 Table 107 Allowed IP Address Range By Class eee 313 Table 108 Natural MASKS eiosataaieeste unies ei e i tee sab a thor EE Ho Piero EATER Es rid a 313 Table 109 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ssssssssssmR 314 Table 110 Two Subnets Example 52 rro rri Sv EFRSSHI E ERR Pria i 314 WS Tr SVE seirin
13. 319 IP Subnetting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Symbols standby ports 110 Numerics 802 1P priority 83 A Access control 206 Access priority 206 Limitation 206 Login account 209 Remote management 217 Service port 217 SNMP 207 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 232 Administrator password 210 Aggregator ID 112 Aging time 78 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 314 Application 36 Backbone 36 Bridging 37 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 38 Switched workgroup 37 Area 0 160 Area Border Router ABR 160 Area ID 165 168 ARP 232 How it works 232 View 232 AS Boundary Router 160 Authentication 165 166 167 168 169 Authority 3 Automatic VLAN registration 85 Autonomous system AS 34 160 174 Index B Backbone 160 Backbone Router BR 160 Basic setting 72 BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units 99 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 99 C CFI Canonical Format Indicator 84 Change password 55 Changes or Modifications 3 Cl Commands 238 Class of Service CoS 128 180 Classifier Ethernet Type 124 Example 126 Packet Format 123 View summary 125 CLI Command Configure tagged VLAN example 289 Static VLAN Table example 294 Cluster management 35 222 Cluster manager 222 226 Cluster member 222 226 Cluster member firmware upgrade 224 Network example 222 Setup 225 Specification 222 Status 223 Switch models 222 VID 226 Web configurator 224 Cluster manager 222 Cluster member 222 Command Forwarding Process E
14. 0 0 0 Address I Destination Prefix Socket Any Number C Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 34 Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification purpose only Ethernet Il tagged and Ethernet Il untagged standards Ethernet I encapsulation Packet Format Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 123 Chapter 18 Classifier GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 34 Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select MAC and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Type Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethe
15. LABEL DESCRIPTION Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactl
16. frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Forwarding to send the frame s to the destination device Port This field displays the port number Immed Leave Select this option to set the switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group No Select this option and enter a number to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group Chapter 22 Multicast 146 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 47 Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Querier The switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast Mode router or server The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the switch dynamically change to using the port as an IGMP query port after it receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the switch always use the port as an IGMP
17. 289 Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 194 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example ras config vlan 3 ras config vlan inactive 42 4 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 42 4 1 GARP Status Syntax show garp This command shows the switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers An example is shown next Figure 195 GARP STATUS Command Example ras show garp GARP Timer Join Timer 200 Leave Timer 600 Leave All Timer 10000 rasi 42 4 2 GARP Timer Syntax garp join msec leav msec leaveall msec where join lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 290 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide leave lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds leaveall lt msec gt This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Peri
18. Ifthe switch has already learned the port for this IP address then it forwards the packet to that port Ifthe switch has not already learned the port for this IP address then the packet is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion e If the switch has already learned the port for this IP address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the packet Figure 147 IP Table Flowchart E Is destination IP address in the IP Table Forward to all ports Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to packet outgoing port Chapter 37 IP Table 230 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 37 2 Viewing the IP Table Click Management IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 148 Sort by OLAF Index IP Table P VID Port IP Address VID Port Type 192 168 1 5 1 6 dynamic 192 168 1 10 0 CPU static 192 168 1 255 0 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group
19. LABEL DESCRIPTION PVID Specify the VLAN group ID or VID that will be added to untagged packets on the port For example if port 10 s PVID is 2 then all untagged traffic on port 10 will belong to and be sent to VLAN 2 Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Frame Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All and Tag Only Type Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 8 6 Port based VLANs Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves
20. purposes Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Address Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch Chapter 23 Static Route 156 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 51 Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displa
21. 30 4 3 DHCP Relay Configuration Example esee 189 Chapter 31 iji e H 190 eam CEI oea 190 She Venna VRRP SUBE xadtdeiatpsepaedn dde d end S RAM DOR DO Ra UR RD 191 v1 2 SOMA VERI suspesdtbus dito n vi ctp ati elt dlas v EH eae tees eene bU uius 192 EXE SIE alin e Tol al o m 192 O1 VR FP GAMO Pl aussosxcsitcshrXbobmituti i vicies bxmaEbRereEel EAR Y VR ELE e D aba Y EVA 193 31 3 2 1 Advertisement Interval nisse ter petE tH EEFF E CeTEE Pe ar 193 xebocro ABT eet eet lee tek eee tere Ae ete 193 31 2 23 Precem Mode 3 ucpaTepeten bx a cele ind T td 193 31 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters 12 iicet teer ensuite trou ni tiep te cape oie 194 31 4 VRRP Configuration SUUNTIGCY 4 acc rper rte RR 3 n RR d Ere ade hints 195 31 5 VRRP Conliguration EXSIDIBS sensescasr ein i anaran Elbe Pede PERI RAS E S 195 31 5 1 One Subnet Network Example Losses eiecti etx ient tetra Lien cto nii 195 21 5 2 DMO BURNS EXample ues ener rere eL aeaa aaa Kop eii PR a d hewn 197 Chapter 32 icri T aisi 200 32 1 The Maintenance SOFODII iu iacceesute eiie setzt te sta spec ced vut d dus EV Ltda reed dis uua 200 d FUNDED DIDI xxxii xovpit wel P S ROS EDO ERR nis 200 323 Restore a Coniiguration liM testi nnna 201 22 4 Backing Up a Configuration FIR sccoietossstecidsdesdccesasanse coc dansacecniseasscencesauarreines 2
22. B See eee ee A t m m eee mmummmmmmm V 39 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install the hardware and make port connections Note Example graphics are shown 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the switch is clean and dry 2 Set the switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the switch These rubber feet help protect the switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet D Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 40 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation ste
23. Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 31 IP Setup OLED Default Gateway Domain Name Server Default Management Management IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 in band C Outofband 182 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 IP Interface Default Gateway IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 D 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 Domain Name DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Server address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow In Band or Out of band the switch is to send packets Management originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the switch send the packets to the management port labelled MGMT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select In Band to have the switch send the packets to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected
24. Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path Chapter 32 Maintenance 204 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 32 7 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Access Control screen The IP address es in the Secured Client Set in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately 205 Chapter 32 Maintenance GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 33 Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the switch 33 1 Overview A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist The console port has higher priority If you telnet to the switch and someone is already logged in from the console port then you will see the following message Figure 124 Console Port Priority Local administrator is configuring this device now Connection to host lost A console port SSH or Telnet session can coexist with one FTP session up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions Table 77 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP The console port SSH and Telnet share One session Up to five accounts No limit one session The Console port has the
25. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen refer to Chapter 18 on page 122 Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number Egress Port Select an outgoing port Outgoing Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port packet format for Egress Port Otherwise select Untag The switch removes the VLAN tag from the packets Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in mega bits per second Mbps Enter a number between 1 and 1023 Out of Profile DSCP Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 6
26. Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This field displays the index number IP Address This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned This field displays CPU to indicate the IP address belongs to the switch Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the switch or static belonging to the switch 231 Chapter 37 IP Table GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 38 ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 38 1 Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address 1s 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 38 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the switch the switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender add
27. Stub area 160 166 Subnet Masks 313 Subnetting 313 SVLAN Table 288 Index 324 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Switch lockout 56 Switch reset 56 Switch setup 77 Syntax Conventions 30 sys Commands examples 268 276 278 Sys log disp 270 276 279 Sys sw mac list 271 System information 72 System log 220 System reboot 202 System up time 67 T Tagged VLAN 84 TCP UDP protocol port numbers 124 Temperature 73 Time Current 76 Time zone 76 Timeserver 76 Time RFC 868 76 Time service protocol 76 Time format 76 Time To Live TTL 176 Time zone 76 Timeserver 76 Transceiver Installation 46 Removal 46 Trap Destination 209 Traps 208 Trunk group 110 Trunking 35 110 Type of Service ToS 180 U UTC Universal Time Coordinated 76 V Ventilation 40 Ventilation holes 40 VID 81 84 88 140 Number of possible VIDs 84 Priority frame 84 VID VLAN Identifier 84 Virtual link 161 168 Virtual router Status 191 Virtual router VR 190 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 190 VLAN 76 84 Acceptable frame type 91 Automatic registration 85 Explicit Tagging 288 ID 84 ID VID 289 Implicit Tagging 288 Ingress filtering 90 Introduction 76 Number of VLANs 88 Port isolation 90 Port number 88 Port settings 90 Port based VLAN 91 Registration Information 288 Static VLAN 88 Status 87 88 Tagged 84 Trunking 86 Type 78 86 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 33 76 VLAN Databases 288 VLAN num
28. T1 O r T2 m r T3 Oo 0 T4 O r T5 O r T6 O r Port Group LACP Timeout 1 None 30 gt seconds 2 None 30 gt seconds 3 None 30 seconds 4 None 30 gt seconds 5 None 30 seconds 6 None 30 seconds 7 None 30 z seconds 8 None 30 seconds 9 None gt 30 2 seconds 10 None gt 30 seconds 11 None 30 seconds 12 None j 30 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority System priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Dynamic Select this check box to enable LACP for a trunk LACP Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs 113
29. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost
30. and events Throughput monitoring ICMP packet transmission Port mirroring and aggregation Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP snooping Firmware upgrade and download through FTP TFTP DHCP server relay Login authorization and security levels read only and read write Self diagnostics FLASH memory Network Management CLI through console port and Telnet Web based management Clustering up to 24 switches can be manage by one IP address SNMP RMON groups history statistics alarms and events MIB RFC1213 MIB II RFC1253 OSPF MIBs RFC1493 Bridge MIB RFC1643 Ethernet MIB RFC1757 Four groups of RMON RFC2674 Bridge MIB extension 309 Product Specifications GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 105 Physical and Environmental Specifications LEDs Per switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port 100 1000 LNK ACT Per mini GBIC port LNK ACT Per Management port 10 100 Dimension Standard 19 rack mountable GS 4012F 438 mm W x 225 mm D x 44 45 mm H GS 4024 438 mm W x 300 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight GS 4012F 3 1 Kg GS 4024 4 2 Kg Temperature Operating 0 C 45 C 32 F 113 F Storage 25 C 70 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Power Supply Overload protection AC model 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 1 5A max internal universal power supply DC model 48VDC 60VDC 1 2A Max Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 6095
31. lt pw string gt lt confirm string gt Changes the administrator password bandwidth Enables bandwidth control control 247 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION bcp Enables Bridge Control Protocol transparency BCP transparency classifier name packet Configures a classifier A format classifier groups traffic into data 802 3untag 802 3tag flows according to specific EtherIIuntag criteria such as the source EtherIItag address destination address Source port number destination P MU port number or incoming port vlan vlan number id ethernet typ ether num ipl ipx arp rarp appletalk decnet sna netbios dlc gt source mac src mac addr source port lt port num gt destination mac lt dest mac addr gt dscp lt 0 63 gt ip protocol lt protocol num tcp udp icmp egp ospf rsvpligmp igp pim ipsec gt establish only source ip lt src ip addr gt mask bits lt mask bits gt source socket lt socket num gt destination ip lt dest ip addr gt mask bits mask bits destination socket socket num inactive gt help Displays help information for this command cluster vlan id Enables clustering in the specified VLAN group member mac address Sets the
32. on the switch ingress check Enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set intrusion lock Enables intrusion lock on the port s and a port cannot be connected again after you disconnected the cable ipmc egress untag vlan lt 1 4094 gt Enables the port s to remove specified VLAN tag from IP multicasting packets before forwarding mirror Enables port mirroring in the interface dir lt ingress egress both gt Enables port mirroring for incoming outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis multicast limit Enables the port s multicast limit lt pkt s gt Sets how many multicast packets the port s receives per second name lt port name Sets a name for the port s string gt Enter a descriptive name up to nine printable ASCII characters no bandwidth limit Disables bandwidth limit on the port s Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 262 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 96 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION broadcast limit Disables broadcast storm control limit on the port s diffserv Disables DiffServ on the port s dlf limit Disables destination lookup fa
33. 01 53 Advanc pplication z i Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s Rx KB s Up Time IP Application 1 Down STOP Disabled D DU 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management y Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 7 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 1673 1509 0 0 0 0 0 3 01 42 10 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 2565 2466 0 32 545 8 95 3 01 42 11 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 41457 3843 0 0 0 0 0 3 01 42 12 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 4373 41647 0 0 0 0 3 01 42 Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop Port ALL E Clear Counter Copyright 1995 2005 by ZyXEL Communicat ne Con Se ER A SZ GS doe Eo Chapter 33 Access Control 216 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 33 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 137 Access Control Service Access Control Service Access Control J Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet Iv p3
34. 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 VID 2 dd Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 r Delete Cancel 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings You can set the switch to assign network information such as the IP address DNS server etc to DHCP clients on the network For the example network configure two DHCP client pools on the switch for the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales networks 1 In the web configurator click IP Application and DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Server link 2 In the DHCP Server screen specify the ID of the VLAN to which the DHCP clients belong the starting IP address pool subnet mask default gateway address and the DNS server address es 3 Click Add to save the settings DACP Server VID 2 Client IP Pool Starting Address fis2 t68 2 100 Size of Client IP Pool 100 oss 2552550 fozes isz182120 Add Cancel Clear IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server VID Type DHCP Status Delete p Server 192 168 1 100 100 r Delete Cancel 61 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 5 1 3 Creating a VLAN VLANS confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 10 as a member of V
35. 122 for more information Chapter 19 Policy Rule 128 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Click Advanced Applications and then Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 57 Policy xmi Active O Name Classifier s General Metering VLAN ID Bandwidth Kbps EgressPort Poni v aere i55 Parameters outgoing packet format for Egress port Tag C Untag Priority fo DSCP TOS o s Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority Send the packet to priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value Action C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packetto the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping orto be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable Drop the packet Out of profile Change the DSCP value action Set OutDrop Precedence Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Asa conc cor The following table describes the labels in this screen 129 Chapter 19 Policy Rule GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 38 Policy
36. 217 Service 218 Trusted computers 218 Reset 56 Reset to factory default settings 202 Restore configuration 56 Return Material Authorization number RMA 5 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF 175 Reverse Path Multicasting RPM 174 Revolutions Per Minute RPM 74 Round Robin Scheduling 135 Router ID 164 Routing domain 79 192 Routing protocol 164 Routing table 234 RSTP Rapid STP 35 Rubber feet 40 S Safety warnings 4 Service access control 217 Service port 217 Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier 140 Service Provider s Network 138 SFP Small Form factor Pluggable 45 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 207 SNMP 207 Agent 207 Communities 209 Management model 207 Manager 207 MIB 207 208 Network components 207 Object variables 207 Protocol operations 208 Setup 209 Traps 208 Versions supported 207 SP TPID 140 Spanning Tree Protocol STP 98 SPN 138 SSH 211 SSH Implementation 212 Static MAC address 35 94 120 Static MAC forwarding 94 Static VLAN 88 Control 89 Tagging 89 Status 51 66 LED 48 Link aggregation 112 OSPF 162 Port 66 Port details 67 STP 99 VLAN 87 VRRP 191 STP 98 Bridge ID 100 Bridge priority 102 Configuration 101 Designated bridge 99 Forwarding Delay 102 Hello BPDU 99 Hello Time 100 102 How it works 99 Max Age 100 102 Path cost 98 102 Port priority 102 Port state 99 Root port 99 Status 99 Terminology 98 STP Spanning Tree Protocol 35 Strict Priority Queuing SPQ 134
37. 275 ALI no Command Exemples siisii A E 276 41 71 uu 276 ss ce na hips MEOT RETE m T 276 Su olo isa winded aie ae 277 41 7 4 no port access authenticator ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeenenes 277 SEEN S NEUTRON ERR ERE NHIEU 278 Su Menace COMMONS c 278 218 T internace por cael udii pecie EFE aiaiai diaa dnia 279 1 52 nteiace TOULGQOIW SIT aiio RES a Er ERo HR EE RETI ERO PER Sr BN R EXER H PEN EPFRINS SR RUE 279 su EIerterri Mmm 280 4184 Mieres ln eet E ED 280 zu mener ps s moo 0 0o 281 Esp uie TII TL UU M 282 cu war eer RT MODI TON 282 41 98 WIGTESSACNOOK c 283 LiB o cp cars erp 283 SuE NIaE MM M M 284 SER mE au 284 QUEE D n TU 285 A1 S BC 008 POY aonsbetsse ap ERIS peer ye errr Ue trT reer rr ee errr ry erre ett Teter RH 285 LIP wol E 286 21 5 15 Spebcd UPN esae ei esa dude rta LEE buna pu aaa ek LR Ra EXE eee nd eu Han 286 17 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands eueeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee nennt 288 42 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Overview sesesseennenen nnns 288 42 2 VLAN Data SES e 288 42 2 1 Static Entries SVLAN Table ca ccdausscasscecsscineaevan csavereeassaiaavarscrawolen staves 288 42 2 2 Dynamic Entries DV LAN Table auiesecxictenice nt
38. 3 General Configuration Mode ssssssiserirersrsnasnssseniniaa s 247 40 9 4 interface port channel Commands sse 261 40 9 5 interface route domain Commands sss 264 40 0 6 c niigVian COMIMANAS t 265 A WO mer OM I IC ENRICO TIENS 266 Table of Contents 16 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 41 Command EXAImpl s seo dax v PPRVQ FAR OUR RERO EE IVA MX RERVEREIUA ELA REAL EDXRA Anani 268 SUAE Sat s NR ET 268 41 2 SHOW COMMMONES P 268 41 2 1 show SY STON THOUS DDTY iaa eu tob quie dpa k etae Fan pez baba aiia bU 268 21 2 2 show hardware monitor c oia o eerie th rbe ek kx Paler apa a ERR FPES S ARRA UNES 269 BU SO wc CET 269 3 1 abge TODO adaspusisebdebencepxaebnn expendi Mapa Fiat Vso is ep eMe pp od 270 A125 SOW E n jic e 270 21 2 8 show mac atddress table 4 5 Let rrr bre a ure Ro idi 271 EUM dg p pi eme 272 ATA WACAPOUNE ccies iia satin sive vaccaabde eostateuesiaivtahuiaestebad iiia oia iani 273 2 25 Enab WP sean a A c dre iE 273 41 6 Configuration File Maintenance 2uxisdesn tote ese upon cc rre E tpe be eap rissaa 274 21 5 07 Configuration BACKUP iuc lenpet EREERPECH MERERI MERCI ER d d e ate 274 41 6 2 Configuration Restoration 1isce cei oie ceat bra eaa E Eae Rad EER PA e aER RA edad kat 274 41 6 3 Using a Different Configuration File eee 275 41 6 4 Resetting to the Factory Default esee
39. 4024 User s Guide Figure 132 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer xi Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or S changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o9 The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate 33 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 133 Security Certificate 1 Netscape Website Certified by an Unknown Authority x Unable to verify the identity of 65 4024 00a0c5012345 as a trusted site A Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration
40. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch HwAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh 227 Chapter 35 Cluster Management GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 36 MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 36 1 Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address 1s dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The switch chec
41. DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of a rule Active This field displays whether a rule is enabled Yes or disabled No Network This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain that is associated to a virtual router VRID This field displays the ID number of the virtual router VR Status This field displays the status of the virtual router This field is Master indicating that this switch functions as the master router This field is Backup indicating that this switch functions as a backup router This field displays Init when this switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the Uplink Status field displays Dead Uplink Status This field displays the status of the link between this switch and the uplink gateway This field is Alive indicating that the link between this switch and the uplink gateway is up Otherwise this field is Dead This field displays Probe when this switch is check for the link state Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling 191 Chapter 31 VRRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 31 3 Configuring VRRP Follow the instructions in the follow sections to configure VRRP on the switch 31 3 1 IP Interface Setup Before
42. DVMRP Default Timer Values DVMRP FIELD DEFAULT VALUE Probe interval 10 sec Report interval 35 sec Route expiration time 140 sec Prune lifetime Variable less than two hours Prune retransmission time 3 sec with exponential back off Graft retransmission time 5 sec with exponential back off 177 Chapter 27 DVMRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 28 IP Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure the IP Multicast screen 28 1 Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast one sender to one recipient or Broadcast one sender to everybody on the network IP Multicast is a third way to deliver IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody You can configure the switch to untag remove the VLAN tags from IP multicast packets that the switch forwards This allows the switch to send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware 28 2 Configuring Click IP Application and IP Multicast in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 89 IP Multicast IP Multicast Port IP Multicast Egress Untag Vian ID o On OH amp M Togam Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 28 IP Multicast 178 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 65 IP Multicast LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This read only field displays the
43. EC DURIdd 116 Figure 30 Porn Authentication MT 117 Figure 51 Port Authentication SO DC sensrinnenenusnennnnnnai n 117 Figure 52 Port Authentication RADIUS uices de eet eee tiere rdi enda 118 Figure 0 ROI SOON aatanspdcnn cepiaoadceidu of bte pu Dd Eva Aoc c ddr VEA GL Ro eid 120 uobuir4dtrcyp c eec ane 123 Figure 55 Classifier Summary ISble 1 opti rrt nets saia 125 Fig re 56 Classifier EXampl D 127 Figure SY Polly e nin tohiusndtndyteskinenenenuaanees 129 Figure 58 Policy Sunday Tabie seccions 131 Fome 29 Policy EXIM Wr TENE Oe 133 FOUS SO Queuing Method e i iaaa rana n 135 Figure 61 VLAN Stacking Example acdc ciiiccaseds ia saiiresscenpasensa Cenerescadataneccesamnabeadinvens 139 Fights G2 VLAN SUID sanankin ninan R 141 Figure 3 Malica SUUS srai 145 Figure 64 Multicast Setting Laud dado de Qva eb ee RR Etpa a ed n PRO Ko ba aD aoa da oda 146 Figure 65 Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile eee 147 Figure 56 MVR Network Example rrr tte ttn arbe three itane EF a nri 149 Figure 67 MVR Multicast Television Example eeeeeeeeeeee rennen 150 Figure 68 Multicast Seting MVR 122 cionis sani d dera iai 150 Figure 69 MVR Group Configuration scs cese errat Lote t ntu h a nuda 152 Figure 70 MYR Configuration Example iussi scri Ed ea EREP RR RPFEX RE E EFE aU HE REIUR 153 Figure 71 MYR Configuration EXASITIDIBG 1 icito rtt rrt rnb ns 153 Figure 72 MVR Group Configuration Example
44. Flow control on 3 1 3 SFP Slots The GS 4012F comes with 12 SFP Small Form factor Pluggable slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details The switch has four pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors 45 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps Note To avoid possible eye injury do NOT look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure 11 Transceiver Installation Example Le 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The switch autom
45. Outgoing Incoming Both and None Version Select the RIP version from the drop down list box Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 159 Chapter 24 RIP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 25 1 Overview OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of CHAPTER 25 OSPF This chapter describes the OSPF Open Shortest Path First routing protocol and shows you how to configure OSPF networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF offers some advantages over traditional vector space routing protocols such as RIP The following table summarizes some of the major differences between OSPF and RIP Table 53 OSPF vs RIP OSPF RIP Network Size Large Small with up to 15 routers Metrics Bandwidth hop count throughput round Hop count trip time and reliability Convergence Fast Slow 25 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas An OSPF autonomous system can be divided into logical areas Each area represents a group of adjacent networks All areas are connected to a backbone also known as area 0 The backbone is the transit area to route packets between two areas A stub area at the edge of an AS is n
46. Ports The following table describes the labels in this screen 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port 111 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Aggregator ID Refer to Section 15 1 2 on page 111 for more information on this field Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group Synchronized Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt statistic polling 15 3 Link Aggregation Setup Click Configuration in the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen to display the screen shown next Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 112 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 48 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration OBST Status Link Aggregation Control Protocol Active O System Priority e5535 Group ID Active Dynamic LACP
47. Primary DNS Server 5213682120 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete Server 182 168 1 100 100 0 Delete Cancel 30 4 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same subnet During the initial IP address leasing the switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the switch 187 Chapter 30 DHCP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 30 4 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The switch can add information to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the switch to add to the client DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP server The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends to the DHCP server Slot ID 1 byte Port ID 1 byte VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes this is opt
48. SSH 7 2 FTP Ie p HTTP Iv feo 3 Minutes HTTPS Vv 443 ICMP Vv SNMP Vv Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 82 Access Control Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes between 1 and 255 a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen 217 Chapter 33 Access Control GS 4012F 4024
49. Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To exchange OSPF packets with peer border router you must set the authentication method and or password the same as the peer border router Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using a simple password Select MD5 to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Add Click Add to apply the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays an index number of an entry 169 Chapter 25 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 61 OSPF Virtual Link continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays a descriptive name of a virtual link Peer Router ID This field displays the ID that uses the format of an IP address in
50. Shared Server Example ssssssssse 39 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection Leeeeeeeeeeesseeesee 40 2 1 Freestanding Installation eee rr 40 242 Mounting the Switelt ond RAOK uiii ese seriei petra tone phat A 41 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements sssssssssssssss 41 vcNNI erae re 41 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 41 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on 8 Rack 1 esses aie annene uua etna nsn p and 41 Chapter 3 Hardware ERI irl T M 44 o Front Panal COSRDOeHIbW sissiisuisseti tuu EN ERE te FIR nee ee 44 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CNEEWUIGI POM c HR 45 3 1 2 Gigabit Eihemet POMS TL 45 3 1 2 1 Default Eihemet Settings icc erit sidusin 45 cA Ili e UE 45 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation oie pH trea A EE 46 a 1 3 2 Transoetver REMOVAL xicscesscscniensisersnirbek Fi stas b secu DI v ieee 46 ER dll M EE ETT 47 34 1 Power toDBBcIDF xucseicisuid dpi pend kPa Minen UMS 47 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector s sss 48 JoPo Pa LEDS auci ede RR Eod des retail virer pA aerated v PUE 48 Chapter 4 Tho Web Sn Turaloh PL aaa 50 SEN ecrit 50 SIME LINN autos bg uit itedhi Mood a a 50 gt TAS SIMS cv Dc 51 43 1 Changa Your Password iussisset ierat epp dap dae Pp dd 55 El Kera ten 56 4 5 Resetting he SW
51. Stacking Multicast Management Static Routing RIP OSPF IGMP DVMRP IP Multicast DiffServ DHCP VRRP Advanced Application plication Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Cluster Management MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 52 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance General Setup VLAN Status RIP Firmware Upgrade Switch Setup VLAN Port Setting OSPF Status Restore Configuration IP Setup Static VLAN OSPF Configuration Backup Configuration Port Setup Static MAC Forwarding OSPF Interface Load Factory Default Filtering OSPF Virtual Link Reboot System Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP Access Control Status DVMRP SNMP Spanning Tree IP Multicast Logins Protocol Configuration DiffServ Service Access Control Bandwidth Control DSCP Setting Remote Management Broadcast Storm Control DHCP Server Status Cluster Management Status Mirroring DHCP Server Cluster Management Link Aggregation DHCP Relay Configuration Link Aggregation VRRP MAC Table Protocol Status IP Table A Status Link Aggregation VRRP Configuration BRP Table Port Authentication Routing Table RADIUS 802 1x Port Security Cla
52. User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 22 1 Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a session layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively 22 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 22 1 2 IGMP Filtering With IGMP filtering you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile
53. VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s Delete To delete the group s and all the accompanying rules select the group s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 22 5 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen 151 Chapter 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 69 MVR Group Configuration OEE c D MVR Multicast VLAN ID X Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Multicast Setting MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that
54. a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the next two fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typicall
55. addr Creates an OSPF area bits gt area lt area id gt no area lt area id gt Removes the specified area no area area id Sets the area to use no authentication authentication None no area area id Sets the area to use the default default cost cost 15 no area area id Disables stub network settings stub in the area no area lt area id gt Sets the area to send LSAs stub no summary Link State Advertisements no area area id Resets the authentication virtual link settings on this virtual link router id authentication key no area lt area id gt Resets the authentication virtual link settings on this virtual link router id message digest key 257 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION no area area id virtual link router id authentication same as area Resets the authentication settings on this virtual area no area lt area id gt virtual link router id Deletes the virtual link from the area no network ip addr bits gt Deletes the OSPF network no redistribute rip Sets the switch not to learn RIP routing information no redistribute static Sets the switch not to learn static routing information redistribute rip metric type lt 1 2 gt metric lt 0 65535 gt Sets the switch to learn RIP routing infor
56. as well as line initialization You can view the initialization information using the console port After the initialization the login screen displays refer to Section 40 3 on page 238 Figure 151 Initial Console Port Screen Copyright c 1994 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp initialize mgmt ethernet address 00 a0 c5 fe ea 70 initialize switch ethernet address 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 Initializing switch unit 0 Initializing switch unit 1 Press ENTER to continue 40 2 3 Telnet Use the following steps to telnet into your switch 1 For local management connect your computer to the RJ 45 management port labeled MGMT on the switch 2 Make sure your computer IP address and the switch IP address are on the same subnet In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 1 1 the default management IP address and click OK 237 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 3 A login screen displays refer to Section 40 3 on page 238 40 3 The Login Screen After you have successfully established a connection to the switch using a direct console connection or Telnet a login screen displays as shown below For your first login enter the default administrator login username admin and password 1234 Figure 152 CLI Login Screen Enter User Name admin Enter Password XXXX 40 4 Command Syntax Conv
57. cl snae S 159 TS ST OSPF VS RIE odi spei ene eae qi vieni d abuela odium ue er ru Tea 160 dae 54 OSPF Puer TVDES ueiscpebeteieteiaspetetasiese vue tence oap ropa abris ation 160 Table 5 COPIE SIRIUS ouiddept suiddimuieden qvidem dedu p Hast i date ada aas 162 Table 56 OSPF Status Common Output Fields esses 163 Table 57 OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings 164 Table 58 OSPF Configuration Area Setup 11 rore ipta rei i ar ea or c d ead 165 Table 59 OSPF Configuration Summary Table 1 ecce rite barre t bar rPE RR Ee Ertnden 166 Table 60 OSPF Ipiernage M 167 Jae TS Pr WSN GOK oiea a petes eai ila cet Rv acea ins 169 Wr Ioltl pee op LT 172 THE OS DY MRF aaiudtlae ce to ar errr RA 176 Table 64 DVMRP Default Timer Values eeecceeeeesseeeeene entes 177 Table 69 IP Multicast 179 B 1 DISO sginean 181 Table 67 Default DSCP IEEE802 1p Mapping cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeees 182 Table 66 DiffServ DSCP Selling iauuousiiscecidsan chiedere iiaiai 183 Table 69 DHCP DHCP Server Status ise r aime ead dta Ln pha ave uta ud ida nanna 185 TRST DIOR o gc 186 Bc ralsl H4 sc 188 Bo 72 URRP TAUS aee TUR mem 191 Table 73 VRRP Configuration IP Interface iacuit rre rct rr reed 193 Table 74 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters sse 1
58. date Back up your current switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 119 Backup Configuration Backup Configuration _ _ Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 201 Chapter 32 Maintenance GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 32 5 Load Factory Defaults Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Defaults to clear all switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults The following message appears Figure 120 Load Factory Default Conformation Microsoft Internet Explorer x 2 Are you sure you want to load factory default g Cancel 2 Click OK to display the screen shown next Figure 121 Load Factory Default Start x A rebooting please close this session then reconnect later 3 Click OK to begin resetting all switch configurations to the factory de
59. device s do not receive these packets Management IP Address Use these fields to set the settings for the out of band management port IP Address Enter the out of band management IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 Chapter 7 Basic Setting 80 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 11 IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration IP Interface Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the switch IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 This is the IP address of the switch in an IP routing domain IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal notation For Mask example 255 255 255 0 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs Add Click Add to save the new rule to the switch It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field display
60. dotted decimal notation of a peer border router Authentication This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Chapter 25 OSPF 170 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 171 Chapter 25 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 26 IGMP This chapter shows you how to configure IGMP 26 1 Overview IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a session layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively The switch supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the switch periodically updates this information 26 2 Configuring Click IP Application IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 7 on page 79 Figure 83 IGMP adum Active O Index Network Version 1 172 21 4 7316 None x 2 192 168 1 1 24 None m App
61. e M 81 Chapter 8 118 84 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANS sse 84 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames eese 84 6 2 Automatic VLAN Registration iicceecesskto rena rer HR M rr Aa Pata ER Cet CHUA 85 BA LET e Barer per er tame penta arene rent er ene rae NEP ae u or UNE eH E er treme DOREM ME 85 wx Ec ido m 85 REA a1 E Gaia cee DET Ed NOI Da UD IE THEE 85 Sua For VLA DUNNO ccietot mish veda de Hadr Evi RR Oan een a pe alunt da bo m 86 CA Slet Hie VLAN TYPE 86 UN io ent 87 SEM edd Er m 87 03 2 Conigure a Siale VLAN axcseneexdissisninedc ir S nds 88 8 5 3 Conngure vLAN Fort Setups usrerrrititate ci t bero anrr E o brpe UR RE d QUE 90 96G Pon bpased YLANS c M 91 8 6 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Liu s i cerni rar tnt Remb nd ek cnni 91 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup iicssiiexio cA Seu n ISnxE IRuUY I RVAR Sa pi IRERR RN D acu SR S aS E CREMA TEE TA 94 SERES Se 94 9 2 Configuring Static MAL Forwarding astusxceiiSdtnnssisendndiiesimbai petites 94 Chapter 10 line 96 UNES S P M 96 15 2 Confiaare a Fiktenng RUIG 22i pr th rna SEU e D IEEE RR ERR ta LFU este ERA 96 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree PEO
62. flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth The switch has eight physical queues QO to Q7 Q7 has the highest priority and QO has the lowest Table 40 Physical Queue Priority QUEUE PRIORITY Q7 8 Highest Q6 7 Q5 6 Q4 5 Q3 4 3 2 1 Q2 Q1 QO Lowest 20 1 1 Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Strict Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q3 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q2 is transmitted until Q2 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q1 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SPQ does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements Chapter 20 Queuing Method 134 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 20 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Schedul
63. highest priority and Telnet has the lowest priority 33 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Chapter 33 Access Control 206 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 125 Access Control ORS SNMP Click Here Logins Click Here Service Access Control Click Here Remote Management Click Here 33 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 and or SNMP version 2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 126 SNMP Management Model Manager gt Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch this switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications
64. how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt statistic polling 7 3 General Setup Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Chapter 7 Basic Setting 74 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 29 General Setup ESE System Name J Location 4 X Contact Person s Name Login Precedence Loca Ony J Use Time Server when Bootup Noe x Time Server IP Address booo Current Time foo Joe 8 New Time hh mm ss foo og Ba Current Date 1970 NN A jo New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 E NN fo Time Zone UTC he It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location up to 30 characters of your switch Contact Person s Name Enter the name up to 30 characters of the person in charge of this switch Login Precedence Use this drop down list box to select which database the switch should use first to authenticate an administrator user for switch management Configure the local
65. identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings T 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites 301 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 207 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of W eb site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting 43 2 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 302 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 208 Internet Options Internet options zx General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security sett
66. ien qiia kh E EA ah Ke eh t Rund a ada 44 Figure 11 Transceiver Installation Example cete 46 Figure 12 Installed TEGPSGOIVEE auedzasuscicss bri di brc eS eri tos RARO da 46 Figure 13 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example eene 46 Figure 14 Transceiver Removal Example eec centena 47 Figure 15 Rear Panel GOS dLTZE Linde idi stia etna inaasanzaasranqseuaacanaeauniccnanmluaassanade 47 Figure 16 Rear Panel GS4024 rnnereennnini innin 47 Figure 17 Read Panel GS 4012F DC Model eene 47 Figura 18 Web Configurator Login 1 iciaesa ui cce er ida khan o pla SER bake Dep da 51 Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screen Status 51 Figure 20 Change Administrator Login Password see 56 Figure 21 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port eeeeeeeeesss 57 Figure 22 Web Configurator Logout Screen uci tetti 58 Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface sssssssssss 60 Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN ssssssseee 62 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID ssses 63 PPM MN CREE 66 Figure 27 Status Port Details 44 corio iiti e a iA 68 Ftguis 29 Sy Sie WI deside e aen rrr bo den odd aaa ba dd wea ries 73 Figure 2 General SOUP sinan AR 75 Figure SO Switch SOUP t tnn n seertesocraeceeatnnnaceeeenns TT ii oU Macro t N A N T S 80 Figure Sg P
67. iid septic HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NUUS RER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 317 IP Subnetting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets see Table 106 on page 312 available for subnetting The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 119 Class B Subnet Planning e RUE HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS Sener gs 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 4 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 IP Subnetting 318 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide
68. is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 229 Chapter 36 MAC Table GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 37 IP Table This chapter introduces the IP table 37 1 Overview The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the switch s ports It shows what device IP address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the switch or static belonging to the switch The switch uses the IP table to determine how to forward packets See the following figure 1 The switch examines a received packet and learns the port on which this source IP address came 2 The switch checks to see if the packet s destination IP address matches a source IP address already learned in the IP table
69. links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports 15 1 1 Dynamic Link Aggregation The switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Etherne
70. more information vlaniq gvrp Enables GVRP port isolation Enables port isolation vlan stacking Enables VLAN stacking on the switch lt SPTPID gt Sets the SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier vlan type lt 802 1q port based gt Specifies the VLAN type Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 260 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 40 9 4 interface port channel Commands The following table lists the interface port channel commands in configuration mode Use these commands to configure the ports Table 96 interface port channel Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION interface port channel lt port list gt Enables a port or a list of ports for configuration bandwidth limit Enables bandwidth control on the port s cir lt Kbps gt Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s egress lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic on the port s ingress lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s pir lt Kbps gt Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port s bpdu control lt peer tunnel discard network gt Sets how Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs are used in STP port states broadcast limit Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch diffserv Enables DiffServ on th
71. no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 83 Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 8 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANS can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number
72. port number IP The switch removes the VLAN tag from IP multicast packets belonging to the specified Multicast VLAN before transmission on this port Egress Enter a VLAN group ID in this field Enter 0 to set the switch not to remove any VLAN tags Untag from the packets Vlan ID Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 179 Chapter 28 IP Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the switch 29 1 Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ 1s a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced not
73. port or the port is transmitting at 100 Mbps 100 Amber Blinking The port is sending receiving data On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up when the 1000 LED is on Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port or the port is transmitting at 1000 Mbps Mini GBIC SFP Slots LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ACT Green Blinking The port is sending or receiving data Off The port is not sending or receiving data Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 48 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 2 Front Panel LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION MGMT Port 10 Green On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 10 Mbps Off The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up 100 Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data at 100 Mbps Off The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up 49 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 4 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or N
74. preempt mode Priority Enter a number between 1 and 254 to set the priority level The bigger the number the higher the priority This field is 100 by default Uplink Gateway Enter the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation The switch checks the link to the uplink gateway Primary Virtual IP Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation Secondary Virtual IP This field is optional Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual router in dotted decimal notation This field is ignored when you enter 0 0 0 0 Add Click Add to apply the changes Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Chapter 31 VRRP 194 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 31 4 VRRP Configuration Summary To view a summary of all VRRP configurations on the switch scroll down to the bottom of the VRRP Configuration screen Figure 105 VRRP Configuration Summary Index Active Name Network VRID Primary VIP Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 1 Yes Example 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 100 110 HL Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Active This field shows whether a VRRP entry is ena
75. priority joins the network it will preempt the lower priority backup router that is the master Disable preempt mode to prevent this from happening By default a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the master router regardless of the preempt mode 193 Chapter 31 VRRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 31 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters After you set up an IP interface configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration Screen Figure 104 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Adertisement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP sme sl E Iv fioo poop TO EMEN Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this VRRP entry Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Network Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies Virtual Router ID Select a virtual router number 1 to 7 for which this VRRP entry is created You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network Advertisement Interval Specify the number of seconds between Hello message transmissions The default is 1 Preempt Mode Select this option to activate
76. r5 rb 18 rb A rb 11 r rl of j 12 r rh ob Apply Cancel Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control 106 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable broadcast storm control on the switch Port This field displays a port number Broadcast pkt s Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 107 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Mirroring This chapter shows you how to configure mirroring on the switch 14 1 Overview Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference 14 2 Port Mirroring Configuration Click Advanced Application Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen You must first select a monitor port
77. rrt Li tr t RR d E Red D A DR dd d puta 210 Figure 129 SSH Communication EXSITEI 1 ioisueke redu aER CHER TR to FR CER nix Rr HFEI ania 211 Figure 130 How SSH WOIKS cucceiiece esie terrd eben t irea RE C etta Cuore dde sechs ti E eee da 211 Figure 131 HTTPS Implementation isis scx inant chat hh ttn oda dinh nad tak hk ck Roda da 213 Figure 132 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer 214 Figure 133 Security Certificate 1 Netscape eene 214 Figure 134 Security Certificate 2 Netscape eeeeeeeeeseseeeeceeeee een 215 Figure 135 Login Screen Internet Explorer ceci 216 Figure 136 Login Screen NeISCape uini rrt t here nba di hri redd 216 Figure 137 Access Control Service Access Control 217 Figure 138 Access Control Remote Management sese 218 Figure 159 WANN 22 pend L omaadt nba dd boa ipa Een ha STA RA GET ad LO pi NATUS ada 220 Figure 140 Clustering Application Example ssssss 222 Figure 141 Cluster Management Status eene 223 Figure 142 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen 224 Figure 143 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 225 Figure 144 Clustering Management Configuration sseeeeees 226 Figure 145 MAC Table Flowchart cascsscatnipsasccacheiiveaneniaiicnedaa chau ER UEKR EUN 228 Figure 146 MAC TAINS e e 22
78. security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable Port Security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 53 Port Security LAE Active r Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address O Iv SIX X 4 OO yn ann ROC NM SIX 4 a KA u HuHu HuHu HuHu Hu HaHa Hn x xI Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 17 Port Security 120 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 33 Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable port security on the switch Port This field displays a port number Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The switch forwards all packets on this port Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address
79. table for the settings Figure 40 Static MAC Forwarding he see MA orwardna NP Active O Name E MAC Address I 4 dE deb i edel 2 VID Port Poni gt Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address Port Delete 1 No Example 00 b2 a0 9c f0 3c 2 1 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup 94 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 18 Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes for this rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Select a port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add After you set the fields above click Add to insert a new rule Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify the settings Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting
80. teteiten Erbe deae ikke ido rb ratis 289 123 Coniguring Tagged VLAN 15e cote nddo dee Mode Hato o dade ott 289 42 4 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands 290 nw RC IE T 290 223 2 GARE TIMO iuiiicicssuiepGdss vYpn GST MSVELER S SVEREWEHRS SEHR SUE ERO OVI IA 290 D NO GVRP gU TT TT 291 AD AA Enable OVR iccanitesateeccecaddonertaviantocs ende odd du c bwin baci a IC p div RUARR 291 424 5 Disable GURP aee T RR 292 22 5 Port VLAN Commande cse tote ce d EUH ER E ep PRESE RAM REND 292 22 5 1 SSP GRE VID cctississsseinsisssssinsasesseseioussvese lances E HER FEST a ER dat 292 42 5 2 Set Acceptable Frame TyD amp ue eret cierre a EP n EVER REACH ki PES quU RE GEERA 292 22 5 3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP 2ecccncisdvis ee sid INE iet ebbe ii oria a sv DUE iieb 293 22 5 4 Modify State VLAN 1r orto i a halo dati t aa 293 42 5 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example eese 294 42 5 4 2 Forwarding Process Example riesen nnns 294 ED a oe Doleta VLAN ID Pm 294 228 Emable VLAN 1 cape nicer ER nIMEI Du DUMP II RAO 295 4AT DUAR VLAN rem 295 42 8 Show VLAN Seting ai saiecadensatenecadanbeoa cuted aranadedaawedacanaeedetiaannedadianneeonianianaga 295 Chapter 43 isle ian 298 43 1 Problems Starting Up the SWIDSD asses casgustseivccies eerie e va bvv vnd 2 aeria innii 298 43 2 Problems Accessing the Switch ssssssssss
81. the IP address of your switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 76 on page 203 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 32 7 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode
82. to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 2 2 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings From the Port Authentication screen click RADIUS to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 52 Port Authentication RADIUS Xu NND Port Authentication Authentication Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 1812 Shared Secret 1234 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Port Authentication RADIUS LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 16 Port Authentication 118 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 119 Chapter 16 Port Authentication GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 Overview Port
83. tries the switch performs the traceroute function This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device The following example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Figure 166 traceroute Command Example ras traceroute 192 168 1 100 traceroute to 192 168 1 100 30 hops max 40 byte packet 1 192 168 1 100 10 ms 10 ms 0 ms traceroute done 41 5 Enabling RSTP To enable RSTP on a port Enter spanning tree followed by the port number and press ENTER The following example enables RSTP on port 10 273 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 167 Enable RSTP Command Example ras config 4 spanning tree 10 ras 41 6 Configuration File Maintenance This section shows you how to backup or restore the configuration file on the switch using TFTP 41 6 1 Configuration Backup Syntax copy running config tftp lt ip gt lt remote file gt where lt ip gt The IP address ofa TFTP server on which you want to store the backup configuration file lt remote file gt Specifies the name of the configuration file This command backs up the current configuration file on a TFTP server The following example backs up the current configuration to a file test cfg on the TFTP server 172 23 19 96 Figure 168 CLI Backup Configuration Example ras copy running config tftp 172 23 19 96 test cfg Ba
84. use WRR queuing A weight value of one to eight is SERT given to each variable from wt 1 to wt 8 An example is shown next Enable port two and ports six to twelve for configuration Enable Weighted Round Robin queuing on the ports Set the queue weights from QO to Q7 Chapter 41 Command Examples 284 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 188 wrr Command Example ras configure ras config interface port channel 2 6 12 ras config interface t wrr ras config interface wrr 87654321 41 8 12 egress set Syntax egress set lt port list gt where lt port list gt Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port based VLAN An example is shown next Enable port based VLAN tagging on the switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the outgoing traffic ports as the CPU 0 seven 7 eight 8 and nine 9 Figure 189 egress set Command Example ras config 4 vlan type port based ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface ft egress set 0 7 9 41 8 13 qos priority Syntax qos priority 0 7 where 0 7 Sets the quality of service priority for a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the IEEE 802 1p quality of service priority as four 4 285 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 8 14 41 8 15 Figure 190 qos priority Command E
85. with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic Figure 70 MVR Configuration Example Vani Multicast VID 200 mL T A B 2 A i i GM ca NEM 1l Lounosdonad To configure the MVR settings on the switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 71 MVR Configuration Example C Multicast Setting Iv Premium 200 amp Dynamic C Compatible Name Multicast VLAN ID Mode Group Configuration Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging o oO O E e o rH 4 O o E 5 e C o DL 5 e C Lol D c d e M 8 O e O 9 e e g DH 10 C G 11 C d m 12 C C G m Add Cancel To set the switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 153 Chapter 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 72 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration g Multicast VLAN ID 200 j z e ia Start Address 230 1 2 50 End Address 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group
86. works 230 View 231 iStacking 35 K Key 168 L LACP 110 System priority 113 Timeout 114 LEDs 48 Limit MAC address learning 121 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 110 Link aggregation 35 110 Dynamic 110 ID information 111 Setup 112 Status 112 Link state database 161 162 Lockout 56 Log 220 Login 50 Password 55 Login account 209 Administrator 210 Non administrator 210 Number of 209 Login password 210 LSA Link State Advertisement 161 MAC Media Access Control 73 MAC address 73 232 Maximum number per port 121 MAC address learning 35 78 94 120 121 Specify limit 121 MAC table 228 Index 322 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide How it works 228 View 229 Maintenance 200 Management Information Base MIB 207 Management port 93 MD5 165 Metric 164 MIB 207 Supported MIBs 208 Mini GBIC ports 45 Connection speed 46 Connector type 46 Transceiver installation 46 Transceiver removal 46 Modifications 3 Mounting brackets 41 MSA MultiSource Agreement 45 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 76 Multicast delivery tree 175 Multicast router mrouter 175 N Network management system NMS 207 NTP RFC 1305 76 O OSPF 34 160 Advantage 160 Area 160 165 Area 0 160 Area ID 165 168 Authentication 165 166 167 168 169 Autonomous system 160 Backbone 160 Configuration steps 161 General settings 163 How it works 161 Interface 161 162 167 Link state database 161 162 Network example 161 Red
87. zyxel kz 7 3272 590 689 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St NORTH AMERICA Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com T Masc support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL Communications A S NORWAY Nils Hansens vei 13 sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway Customer Support GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE info pl zyxel com 48 22 333 8250 www pl zyxel com ZyXEL Communications POLAND ul Okrzei 1A 48 22 333 8251 03 715 Warszawa Poland http zyxel ru support 7 095 542 89 29 www zyxel ru ZyXEL Russia RUSSIA Ostrovityanova 37a Str sales zyxel ru 7 095 542 89 25 Moscow 117279 Russia support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications SPAIN Arte 21 5 planta sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 28033 Madrid Spain support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S SWEDEN Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden support ua zyxel com 380 44 247 69 78 www ua zyxel com ZyXEL Ukraine UKRAINE 13 Pimonenko Str sales ua zyxel com 380 44 494 49 32 Kiev 04050 Ukraine UNITED KINGDOM support zyxel co uk 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only www zyxel co uk
88. 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ri Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 138 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 444 496 0 0 0 0 0 2 17 50 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Poll Interval s jao Set Interval Stop Port ALL z Clear Counter The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 66 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 6 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION System up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 27 on page 68 Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports State This field displays the STP Spanning Tree Protocol state of the port See the chapter on STP for details on STP states LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames o
89. 0 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A Product Specifications 310 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 311 Product Specifications GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide APPENDIX B IP Subnetting IP Addressing Routers route based on the network number The router that delivers the data packet to the correct destination host uses the host ID IP Classes An IP address is made up of four octets eight bits written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP addresses are categorized into different classes The class of an address depends on the value of its first octet Class A addresses have a 0 in the left most bit In a class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID e Class B addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit In a class B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID Class C addresses begin starting from the left with 1 1 0 In a class C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID e Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting There is also a class E address It is reserved for future use Table 106 Classes of IP Addresses IP ADDRESS OCTET 1 OCTET 2 O
90. 01 32 9 Losd Factory DefaullS 5 cess sasissunasuinauslind EUR EDI ERO EE rtp bez Ern iota REEE 202 is DOO oy Oll susndssbebvenddibntind de ndum Epp hand ee eee eee aaa 202 erf FTP Commend Le irisan iu Roe RR i oed e te iuba 203 32 7 1 Filename Conventions ous oseccaeeer bed NER ak Ub pH opa dedi pna ud Leda 203 ete lal Example PF TP CONITIaBOB 2 oocsicsuetaepe etr ku PI s PU Eee tr b EY HE Rave rs 203 Table of Contents 14 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 32 7 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 21 ccr Ert ERR Ft td eratis EO nid 204 32 7 3 ta ese FIP e P 204 32TA F TP RESICUONIS bs 205 Chapter 33 PCCOSS Controls M 206 RW RAEI ec CR 206 33 2 The Access Control Main Seren issnsiotiee perte hore te tEEEME PIS EXER PUT e ES ENA 206 22 0 AbbuL SNMP Lusso attese eria Dot Dac SR UR UR DAR RU 207 gaa SUPPE MIBE cec 208 Due SNMP NODS ciztustaadessceniqsbiidbacnebbesscuntebdtineniaeediseessi sect daunsanenddeeneanarnanes 208 Doaa COnN SNMP e X X 209 xS E Mu ra Balbo Piero ic E 209 cum caer crisisen irna ebiad onida b erigit dioer tales 211 udo HON ESSE WOES oen se PT re bId v S Ra ERA iod adem cf ete ep Ee ma pI d Uc xtA Lnd 211 23 0 SSH Implementation on the SWIC isi sot trip taa E rra ne raai 212 33 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH 1st rmn tnr ent tad 212 dar ISO MONON D ET DES aea ccecoc db e nau ENEA a SEU I FEN EU PAR Aoa Ea QUA Ref DUM RR RA 212 SNIGELIERReE s 213 33 8
91. 024 User s Guide 25 5 Configuring OSPF Interfaces To configure an OSPF interface first create an IP routing domain in the IP Setup screen see Section 7 7 on page 79 for more information Once you create an IP routing domain an OSPF interface entry is automatically created In the OSPF Configuration screen click Interface to display the OSPF Interface screen Figure 81 OSPF Interface Index Network Oso Network Area ID Authentication Key ID Key Cost Configuration 192 168 1 1 24 7 No Configured Area Id v None hd 1 15 Add Cancel Clear Area ID Authentication Cost Delete Delete Cancel Key ID The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 OSPF Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Select an IP interface Area ID Select the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authentication Note OSPF Interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method Choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To participate in an OSPF network you must set the authentication method and or password the same as the associated area Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting
92. 024 User s Guide Figure 20 Change Administrator Login Password Edit Logins Login 1 2 3 4 Please record your TreveTresswered if you have forgotten your password acne Administrato User Name Password Access Control ever you change it The system will lock you out Retype to confirm Apply Cancel 4 4 Switch Lockout Note You cannot log into the switch using the same administrator account concurrently on different IP routing domains You could lock yourself and all others out from the switch by 1 Deleting all IP routing domains 2 Deleting all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the switch 3 Filtering all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disabling all ports 5 Misconfiguring the text configuration file 6 Forgetting the password and or IP address 7 Preventing all services from accessing the switch 8 Changing a service port number but forgetting it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the switch 4 5 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the switch back to the factory defaults Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 56 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 4 5 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the cu
93. 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages cccceccccceseeecccceeetseccceeneeseees 213 33 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages sse 214 258 3 The Maini SOIBOIT iiaesss tassi tees tsi vub eue tl0 EXER CIXY PR haana PELA EE a PAS 215 33 9 Service Port Acc ss Contool MOM 217 33 10 curQqU a cRcJD DNO EEUU 217 Chapter 34 RED fe asii 220 sh AIO SU TTMIT T HR MM 220 Chapter 35 Cluster ManagermeliL inei sus n ea ue TRENAR Ru NEAR RNSR RENS RR RASRMNR SR MS A RR IARE R ASA Aa ic ISSN EA 222 DUMP I I oaa 222 25 2 Cluster Manag ment SUIS Lus rp d ES Fr d 43S 0 Fa bp d E ro Ade 223 35 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management eese 224 35 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch 224 35 3 Configuring Cluster Management 2 2 ctr erra aar hore e nre bra aene iode 225 Chapter 36 MAGC TADE e Ea ia ai 228 E UREE uu ET DU A A Teen E E A E A E EAA 228 enu Viewing the MAC Tablo user bee ais RR HELD NEL RR 229 15 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 37 ui m 230 BI ENE IO C us ahaa te adres aa a mdi ied cepa bel deuda UEA 230 37 2 Viewing TS IP WARNE rr 231 Chapter 38 iig e 232 SN PU I NET EL DN lend al Si LE 232 SO THOM PIDE Ee 232 284 Viewing The ARP
94. 16 P r PTET TCU s T T 116 LM EUIS T ENT m UN T NM 116 TG IRADIS coc hertbcydisdi peut oU e EE FEN E EUM EL C eed ernie FEL CI I ELBU DIARI 116 16 2 Configuring Port Authentication esee terna retta rita naa unn 116 15 2 T Activa ng IEEE COZ TX SECU atsiekeiasscnicied kb nnna 117 16 2 2 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings seeeeeeseeeeee 118 Chapter 17 PEE SO CUNY P ESTA 120 DOO colat ean ete 120 17 2 POM SSCUIMY SOUP e 120 Chapter 18 KLLIIQ 122 TO C NENIEN RR D D E T 122 18 2 Configuring the Classifigl 122 oocirepr etait o rec tbec ienna uer ceseaanaccaaveeanes 122 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration eeeeeeessss 125 p vuerccurdutH m A 126 11 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 19 FOE BUG iaxddtccidasrie deu EROR REF RUE eFUE In AMARE M Eid A SEE TERM ERU ER SR CREER QUA 128 TEL TENETI tia catus ute a a ebd adelante lesan i vide NATA ELE 128 TOA A DUNS a AM E 128 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop BeligViDE aaeain anniina s ada ai 128 19 2 C onngumna POlG RUNGE audieris guckkke ses akkEHpodiaaYE FE UA CEN ER EX e 128 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration recette ttti 131 18 4 Poley EXHRIDIG oui satan pd Dodd td pea R Cua 132 Chapter 20 sr npa goo m mU 134 20T COMER NOW E
95. 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1253 OSPF MIBs SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 33 3 2 SNMP Traps The switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs SNMP traps supported are outlined in the following table Table 79 SNMP Traps OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION SNMPv2 Traps Cold Start 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the switch is turned on WarmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the switch restarts linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up Chapter 33 Access Control 208 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 79 SNMP Traps continued OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non authenticated hosts RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes topology change 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes 33 3 3 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen Figure 127 Access Control SN
96. 200 r News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 O Delete Cancel Figure 73 MVR Group Configuration Example NAD Multicast VLAN ID 200 z e ia Name Start Address End Address Be ere Start Address End Address Delete All O Movie 230 1 2 50 224 1 4 10 230 1 2 60 News 224 1 4 50 Esse pesi Chapter 22 Multicast 154 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 155 Chapter 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 23 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 23 1 Configuring Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Click IP Application Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 74 Static Routing Index Active Name 1 Yes ED Static Routing NEED Active a Name Destination IP Address noon IP Subnet Mask nono Gateway IP Address ono Metric sal Example Add Cancel Clear Gateway Address Metric Delete 192 168 1 2 2 rH Destination Address Subnet Mask 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 51 Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification
97. 24Gbps GS 4012F non blocking Max Frame size 1522 bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet Il PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1d spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1w rapid reconfiguration to recover network failure QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues Supports RFC 2475 DiffServ DSCP to IEEE 802 1p priority mapping Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K Supports GVRP Link aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Six groups up to 8 ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 1Mbps increment Supports IGMP snooping Product Specifications 308 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 103 General Product Specifications continued Layer 3 IP forwarding Wire speed Features 8K IP address table Filtering based on the source destination IP address Routing Unicast RIP V1 V2 OSPF V2 protocols Multicast DVMRP VRRP IP services DHCP server relay Layer 4 TCP UDP port based filtering Features Bandwidth management Table 104 Management Specifications System Control Alarm Status surveillance LED indication for alarm and system status Performance monitoring Line speed Four RMON groups history statistics alarms
98. 3 if you want to replace or remark the DSCP number for out of profile traffic Action Specify the action s the switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1 priority to replace the 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1 priority field with IP TOS value to replace the 802 1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Chapter 19 Policy Rule 130 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 38 Policy continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DiffServ Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802 1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to sent
99. 35 Login Screen Internet Explorer Web Configurator Microsoft Internet Explorer Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help sack gt O A A Qsearch Favorites iMeda Q Gr S SI S ades Elhtsiiezimii Go Gs Er ZyXEL Basic Setting Ex oD Advanced Application System Up Time 2 59 52 Status El Logout B Help Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TX KB s Rx KB s Up Time IP Application n 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 Management 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 0 00000 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 00 00000 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 D 0 00 00 00000 9 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 1673 1509 0 00 00 2594 10 100MfF Copper FORWARDING Disabled 2394 2346 D 17837 3822 25941 11 100MfF Copper FORWARDING Disabled 41246 3802 0 0428 Q0 25941 12 100MfF Copper FORWARDING Disabled 4322 41406 0 00 0128 25941 Poll Interval s jao Set Interval Stop Port ALL 7 Clear Counter N Copyright 1995005 by ZyXEL Communications Corp Figure 136 Login Screen Netscape Ele Edt View Go Bookmarks Tools Window Help Back Forward Reload Stop Mh https 192 168 1 1 z o 49 Asearch P Download Af Customize ZyXEL F Status O Logout B Help r System Up Time 3
100. 5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Cost This field displays the interface cost used for calculating the routing table Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again 25 6 OSPF Virtual Links Configure and view virtual link settings in the OSPF Virtual Link screen In the OSPF Configuration screen click Virtual Link to display the screen as shown next Chapter 25 OSPF 168 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 82 OSPF Virtual Link Index Name GD OSPF Virtual Link END Configuration Name nam Area ID No Configured Aree ic il Peer Router ID noon Authentication None Key ID i Key sid Add Cancel Clear Peer Router ID Authentication Key ID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 61 OSPF Virtual Link LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Select the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Peer Router ID Enter the ID of a peer border router Authentication Note Virtual interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method Choices are
101. 5 128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 IP Subnetting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all 0 s is the subnet itself all 1 s is the broadcast address on the subnet Table 113 Subnet 1 NETWORK NUMBER VAM EIE IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 114 Subnet 2 NETWORK NUMBER VATUECER M BIE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lo
102. 9 Figure 147 IF Table CINE cco aac coh adarosiia ptas tbea t laden rnanan ins Eria Eaa 230 iL AEN 231 EOD NL PLI deccm 233 Figure 150 Routing Table Status usce e orat Luna ki en utu ki n ond 234 Figure 151 Initial Console Port SOPOBE 1icccccorcscccc cei eene cceet eene tacere ioteaceets oeseceve ree 237 Figure 152 GLI Login SCOSI isisisi LI Er risa Ero TH adire Peto PT FA PR PAS 238 Figure 153 CLI Help List of Commands Example 1 sss 239 Figure 154 CLI Help List of Commands Example 2 ssssssssuss 240 Figure 155 CLI Help Detailed Command Information Example 1 240 Figure 156 CLI Help Detailed Command Information Example 2 240 Figure 157 CLI History Command Example ccccsccscccsseessecessneescnsneesscccnseeness 241 Foure To CL Wite MEMO sarria iadan EASE EEEE Enan EEAS 241 Figure 159 show system information Command Example 268 Figure 160 show hardware monitor Command Example ss 269 Figure 161 show ip Command Example cene nte tir tkm ni Rn ra na nk Ro Pha nanahan 270 Figure 162 show logging Command Example ceeccsseeeeenencnee een 270 Figure 163 show interface Command Example eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeennennaa 271 Figure 164 show mac address table Command Example ssssss 272 Figure 165 ping Command Example scienter atid
103. 94 Table 75 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters uere totu tr ba ro eA RR pe Ere rk g a uS 195 Table 76 Filename Conventions sermoirik 203 Table 77 Access Control Overview Louise ich nata RP x eek ch tx aka ER PIA DR En a ou 206 Table TS SNMP CORNEA Saesenprdsteiecue to PR PERIERE DIN EPA TN EO Ort aaa 208 Table TS SNMP Traps 2asstaststntbern albae to em DER tite Da La 208 Table 80 Access Control SNMP sesion aaa kao oh kd ro ER aad Kato RM LL Luka 209 Tabla 81 Access Control Logins isis e cette petit nee ttd ane bUc ra v Erbe rk cd di Erud 210 27 List of Tables GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 82 Access Control Service Access Control 217 Table 83 Access Control Remote Management see 218 BEER anana aa a ARa 220 Table 85 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications sssssssss 222 Table 86 Cluster Management Status 1uiueieceie it rop ette pe te vet ba SPI cte ERE PPXQA EE EH EXE UA 223 Table 87 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example sss 225 Table 88 Clustering Management Configuration 2 02 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 226 Hr cr gordo Wee cr NUT 229 Tahe 2 0 Ml Ec Mx at ee Prema pire Pete Uy ert eee Pre Tener rere er rey renee oer ener yr etre rer 231 TEN ARR TAIDE 52s o cebacidicheb hina tation an Pose Lasten ipa ELLO EUR eas 233 Table 92 Routing Table SIUS sacccciccccrdcccsnsensicssn seme eee eR 234 Table 93 Command Summary User Mode
104. A monitor port is a port that copies the traffic of another port After you select a monitor port configure a mirroring rule in the related fields Figure 46 Mirroring Li Active O Monitor Port Poti Uv a Mirrored Direction Dn ngress v ngress ngress ngress ngress ngress ngress ngress Qc m OO ROOM ngress o ngress v ngress v DUELO DinDmimiagipgigigimgiggimin ngress v Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Chapter 14 Mirroring 108 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 26 Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear this check box to deactivate port mirroring on the switch Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Select this port from this drop down list box Port This field displays the port number Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 109 Chapter 14 Mirroring GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 15 Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical
105. CTET 3 OCTET 4 Class A 0 Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Class B 10 Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Class C 110 Network number Network number Network number Host ID Note Host IDs of all zeros or all ones are not allowed Therefore A class C network 8 host bits can have 28 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 16 host bits can have 216 2 or 65534 hosts A class A address 24 host bits can have 274 2 hosts approximately 16 million hosts IP Subnetting 312 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Since the first octet of a class A IP address must contain a 0 the first octet of a class A address can have a value of 0 to 127 Similarly the first octet of a class B must begin with 10 therefore the first octet of a class B address has a valid range of 128 to 191 The first octet of a class C address begins with 110 and therefore has a range of 192 to 223 Table 107 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY DECIMAL Class A 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask h
106. Chapter 15 Link Aggregation GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 114 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 115 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 16 Port Authentication This chapter describes the 802 1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup 16 1 Overview IEEE 802 1x is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server 16 1 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal d
107. Disables authentication on the listed ports An example is shown next Disable authentication on the switch Disable re authentication on ports one three four and five Disable authentication on ports one six and seven 277 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 176 no port access authenticator Command Example ras config no port access authenticator ras config 4 no port access authenticator 1 3 5 reauthenticate ras config 4 no port access authenticator 1 6 7 41 7 5 no ssh Syntax no ssh key lt rsal rsa dsa gt no ssh known hosts lt host ip gt no ssh known hosts host ip 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa where key lt rsal rsa dsa gt Disables the secure shell server encryption key Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts host ip Remove specific remote hosts from the list of all known hosts known hosts lt host ip gt Remove remote known hosts with a specified public key 1024 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa bit RSA1 RSA or DSA An example is shown next Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 8 from the list of known hosts Remove the remote host with IP address 172 165 1 9 and with an SSH RSA encryption key from the list of known hosts Figure 177 no ssh Command Example ras config 4 no ssh key rsal ras config 4 no ssh known hosts 172 165 1 8 ras config 4 no s
108. ENE 53 Table GOMES em 67 Table 7 Status Port Details ssec pides Peer teb te aile pedes Lange aa DOR ER ERN 68 Hcc uda c 73 Table Gonera SEUR Ho 75 I TUE SUN PEE 78 Tade Ti IPF Sem m 80 Tab T2 POCOS saeia T a m He e ada a 82 Table T3 EEE 802 10 VLAN Terminology aoeccece pete boee tet E EP eo VERRE IPTE SEES o ErE 0A 85 D TA VLAN LG ELI Mee 88 Table 15 VLAN Stalio VLAN Lusso ctia Yat E EEA a e EA ANNE sented baambiaeionuy 89 Table 16 VLAN VLAN Port Setting scsschesscamaasessccacsavnncccasanerrciaassrnsracaaaaponnanmaaross 90 Table 17 Port Based VLAN SSI 2 od D m opti aa oed dad 93 Table 18 Static MAC Forwarding ieuueceius or tate rra dq opea de adapt eames ERE EAR BI ERI 95 Table 10 FINNO 96 Table ZU STP Palli DOSIS ssiri E pte Mte Oa AAAA 98 Table z 1 STE Poit SEIS iouis bie e E 99 Table 22 Spanning Tree Protocol SEMIS iussisse reet rrt reb e breed 100 Table 23 Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration eeseeeee 101 Table 24 Bandwidth Contool sassoni t EP ORE IMP TI A E osea Sla lutan Ee IUE 105 Table 25 Broadcast SIT Control uiuere tien RP eTETE ER E APER HERI ELE odd 107 B ud UC NOU TM 109 Table 27 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch ecce nent eenee 111 Table 28 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch ecce nnns 111 Table 29 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status 112 Table 30 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration
109. Ethernet type VLAN group MAC address and or port number A layer 3 classifier groups traffic according to the IP address and or TCP UDP protocol number Configure QoS on the switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 19 on page 128 to configure policy rules 18 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that match the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 19 on page 128 Click Advanced Application and Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Chapter 18 Classifier 122 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 54 Classifier Classifier Active Name Packet Format fall VLAN bi Any feum Any riori c pa Ethernet All Layer 2 Type C others Hex MAC An Source Address C MAC E 8 8 Port All Port gt MAC o Any panoan Address C MAC E f Si 3 ix Em Eli DSCP b ci o amp All 7 I Establish Only IP Protocol C Others Dec IP Address lpooo 0 0 0 0 Address y Source Prefix Layer 3 Socket Any Number C IP Address
110. GS 4012F 4024 Ethernet Switch User s Guide rsion 3 60 n 1 2006 ZyXEL GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Copyright Copyright O 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Copyright 2 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Interference Statements and Warnings FCC Statement This switch complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This switch may not cause harmful interference 2 This switch must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A dig
111. Help Detailed descriptions of the commands 40 5 1 List of Available Commands Enter 11 to display a list of commands you can use Figure 153 CLI Help List of Commands Example 1 The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands List of available commands under a command group Enter help to display a list of available commands and the corresponding sub commands ras help Commands available help logout exit history enable show ip cr show hardware monitor C F show system information ping lt ip host name gt cr ping lt ip host name gt ping help traceroute ip host name cr traceroute ip host name traceroute help ssh 1 2 lt user dest ip gt cr ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt command lt gt ras gt 239 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 154 CLI Help List of Commands Example 2 ras enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC help Description of the interactive help system history Show a list of previously run commands logout Exit from the EXEC ping Exec ping show Show system information ssh SSH client traceroute Exec traceroute ras 40 5 2 Detailed Command Information Enter command help to display detailed sub command and parameters Enter comm
112. IG sce eiseesesee ke ci ivbii Eel EID Le cer dv Gecko vidrio eli Tura tust 56 4 5 1 Reload the Configuration File 1i orte or do Ro S Rd 57 45 Logging Out or the Web Configurator auuiceloieitacr etat sbrber eee to bu vea HR Og bob bDIEE 57 MEL M 58 Chapter 5 Initial Setup EXampl e ina vezic sedit isla iari ezazi r Verde es jas serPSEREEIO 020 o Pra seccsiienslaniatiesin 60 SN Ui NR S T IN NNI OTEN 60 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interfalee 2 oai ertet ertet o eter epaaeo eere tun necp rta desee pres 60 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Setllngs 122r eth eri Ia Yn ttn oett 61 So Ceu a VLOM ousdiausiqauecpi ues devipi d e RN RUIN RPM tre tre 62 EE uos 63 SEED E ET 64 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Lii iue inpar dasin sh Rxa Eia yx I FE bePab idR Pa MR iE E Mp RE 66 3mERC i7 m 66 Xd Pomo aus SUNA a 66 220 FON BIAS gso a E RE 67 Chapter 7 Basie SEUNG saienisi HN 72 pnmER lo mr 72 Ta MO MMM ss i ae rebat ea a cia hla Sane lls en ROME M Ded 72 To General OGU aga 74 9 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 7 8 Nitoducomto NLANG isisao eH ERE o EE ub TR E pent pod dg 76 peau unge EO O T sata I E E AEN E E AA E TTA 77 TO Switoli Setup SOMA rirorio itti reina eonan Enesi Ena EE EEA iaia 7T 4 PSEUD eios oed es bate p Ee po dei E na Rc E ande cm sere ashes 79 HESGANIZADCNEDSCOCNSESRS OS E ETE 79 TO PONE SOU
113. IOEO LL iiie ixixiisiudi deni 3AYRE Ant MAR UR RIREEES MEAS K0Sdac MEL MM al quine nri TG 98 WASP TOMNI aicut enu e m PE EoFDee ba pat v aN 98 Walt HOw SITP WORS e 99 Jm IPFON ARS NR T T T 99 TAGE STEP SUMUS Susscudsaimenpaiqadu dri nd rb dud Dade tr M NEM M MU edad 99 jsp scent psx aseeuth bac dash compasanth E 101 Table of Contents 10 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 12 Babldwidis COMTO Gi dicitivetiesneE tite s URS ERE PER FA EREVE TR AMENS EM ERREUR YRAESRURM REN ERE RMR ER 104 12 1 Introduction ta Bandwidth COD uias et rre Fevrier hee a 104 TAT UR apa PP pe 104 12 2 Bandwidth Control SOME suse sena ker rtp ES RR a EX LEREda aaan at dur Rede dg Ru 104 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Conlrol uiensao nuo scoop otn Una cRR ED cen eg e DnSpA Su PERO ii EUR ME SEEN KRUES CHEN 106 Ol OE Pec eerenian anion aaa 106 13 2 Broadcast Storm Comrol Sell uiuere t rere ER rti EH np EE Ew EF o AER TRAE 106 Chapter 14 PEE OEMS auia T SAXA ARR m E Rd GR EAE RAS KRRXXR RR ERE REEF D NER EE TEE 108 LEES o e 108 14 2 Porn Minrornng Comiguraton MT 108 Chapter 15 Link Pe AIG cio uiia aninha ina ARUM IE TANASE NANa AAEE NA AAAA Ai 110 To RTE eiai done eii bimesocten eu ien ndapsntee ai I PON iude 110 15 1 1 Dynamic Link AdggregallOfi essei eere er eruitur iti 110 191 2 LANA Posi TD east dead de seta SEU UN 111 p VE epu Eta qe T 15 3 Link Aggregate SSUP dicturi sworn adaadCetn A a 112 Chapter
114. IP To exchange routing information with other routing devices across different routing domains enable RIP Routing Information Protocol in the RIP screen 1 Click IP Application and RIP in the navigation panel 2 Select Both in the Direction field ox to set the switch to broadcast and receive routing information 3 In the Version field select RIP 1 Index Network Direction Version Li 1 172 23 19 85 24 Both x RIP for the RIP packet format that is oe m E UM L universally supported Appl Cancel 4 Click Apply to save the settings Aey cove Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 64 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 65 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 6 System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 6 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 26 Status EX ToD System Up Time 2 18 01 Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s Rx KB s Up Time hd Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0
115. LAN 2 Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN f H QUE SC ret gt _ i E A L 0 uuuuuumumuuumEEEEMEEmmmT 1 Click Advanced MEE VLAN Port Setting Application and VLAN in ee ee z Port Number the navigation panel and Index VID 2 4 5 8 10 12 Elapsed Time Status click the Static VLAN link oe e oe 1 1 u u u u v u 2 54 57 Static u u u u Uu U Pollinterval s 40 Set Interval Stop Change Pages Previous Page Next Page Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 62 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 2 In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the Sales network Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the Sales network is connected to port 10 on the switch select Fixed to configure port 10 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware Port ON Oa d wns ED Statie VE AN Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal C Normal Normal VLAN Status Control Tagging C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging C Fo
116. MP il Access Control Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public CO Apply Cancel Trap Destination The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Access Control SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Enter the get community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Enter the set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trap Community Enter the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Trap Destination Enter the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 33 3 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the switch via web configurator at any one time 209 Chapter 33 Access Control GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide An administrator is someone who can both view and configure switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 e A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone w
117. NS 185 Figure do DHCP Server iuuuidiacieceiicdd rei t aaockck end dddricu tola idoc tani ddr aed d eaa a sat diac Lnd 186 Figure 96 DHCP Server Network Example eeeeesseeseseiesee eee enna nnt 187 Figure 97 DHCP Server Configuration Example eeeeeeeeeenennene nennen nnne 187 Figurg FO DHOCF Roay xisosozctvimdisimaduxeppcdisdvenddzssscuterizietsion issue D SR PP PO A 188 Figure 99 DHCP Relay Network Example icoc cccccceteccc sees ernannt nh d tnu anh 189 Figure 100 DHCP Relay Configuration Example sse 189 Figure TOT MERE POMPI T uico ior aeo Rr eO P o E ed eo doc bla oda 190 Foame TOS VISISIS SIUS sirni aH eir tH ERN ERU ERR M Sr antt to s M M EE RRIMR 191 Figure 103 VRRP Configuration IP Interface 1 i cies cect emittit eer tnt 192 Figure 104 VRRP Configuration VRRP Parameters eese 194 Figure 105 VRRP Configarador SUMMA 15oiirr rei teer red nr eEE spo EFPEU ina 195 Figure 106 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network 196 Figure 107 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A 196 Figure 108 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B 196 Figure 109 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A ssesssssss 197 Figure 110 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch B 197 Figure 111 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network 197 Figure 112 VRRP Examp
118. ON SEUD ausscatiimdiebuaeu kt ndi mue E 82 Figure 33 For VLAN Trunking uod oatrove d per da kp RR Db E Sp rt d pupa 86 Figure 34 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type c c ccccceceeeeecceeeeeeeecceeeeeseeceeeeeeeees 87 Figure 35 VLAN VLAN SIAEIS uucucisesecccti sacsecorecesce dri nenin scit e lues eerte E 87 Figure 36 VLAN Static VLAN 89 Figure 37 VLAN VLAN Port Selig srccruonsrcrnerki rn N ER 90 Figure 38 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected see 92 List of Figures 20 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 39 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation sseeeeeeees 92 Figure 40 Static MAC Forwarding ausucsesecenucu netics tkm hu d etna a nha xa ERR Rak Fr Ru phai edt da ka pA ca 94 Figure 4i Fenm e 96 Figure 42 Spanning Tree Protocol Status 2s di perta tin aea 100 Figure 43 Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration eeeeeeeeeee 101 Figure 44 Bandwidth COUFOD auuccccsazecces sensore testekcet t aba bete t e teretes tutus Ford smit cerra 105 Figure 45 Broadcast Storm Control uisus acean baie tta kb ha din La L9 RR AIR EY Red dad abad 106 Figare 40 Minne cinco 108 Figure 47 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status eseese 111 Figure 48 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration ssss 113 Figure 49 RADIUS SOVOF iuisxceccicsecc cce consect sca torte tete Xn pEL QUEE CEPI dl pc UE LL d DUE
119. P static route route ip mask Enables a specified IP static inactive route lacp Disables the link aggregation control protocol dynamic trunking on the switch logins Disables login access to the specified name mac filter name name mac mac addr vlan lt vlan id gt drop lt src dst both gt inactive Enables the specified MAC filter rule name lt name gt mac lt mac addr gt vlan lt vlan id gt drop lt src dst both gt Disables the specified MAC filter rule mac forward name name mac mac addr vlan lt vlan id gt interface lt interface id gt Removes the specified MAC forwarding entry belonging to a VLAN group if any forwarded through an interface s name lt name gt mac lt mac addr gt vlan lt vlan id gt interface lt interface id gt inactive Enables the specified MAC address belonging to a VLAN group if any forwarded through an interface s mirror port Disables port mirroring on the switch multi login Disables another administrator from logging into Telnet or the CLI mvr Displays MVR on the switch policy lt name gt Deletes the policy A policy sets actions for the classified traffic inactive Enables a policy port access authenticator Disables port authentication on the switch port list Disables authentication on the listed ports lt port list gt reau
120. PID Service Provider Tag Protocol IDentifier Data Frame data VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 140 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 21 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications and then VLAN Stacking in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 62 VLAN Stacking COKE Active r SP TPID 2 neo Cc others Hex Port Role SPVID Priority Access Port n T 2 Access Port NEN o 2 3 Access Pon ll np y 4 Access Port NENNEN o 2 5 Aesp o E 8 Access Port NN o 2 7 Access Por il cd y 8 Access Por me o 2 a Access Port fl o 2 10 Access Por NN o s i Access Pon A o s 12 Access Port z Pa 0r Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the switch SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop down list box or select Others and then enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to OxFFFF 0x denotes a hexadecimal number It does not have to be typed in the Others text field Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Role Select Normal to have the switch ignore fra
121. RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the switch sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 24 2 Configuring Click IP Application RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown You cannot manually configure a new entry Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 7 7 on page 79 Chapter 24 RIP 158 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 75 RIP xu Active C Index Network Direction Version 1 192 168 1 1 24 None RIP 1 gt Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable RIP on the switch Index This field displays the index number of an IP interface Network This field displays the IP interface configured on the switch Refer to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains Direction Select the RIP direction from the drop down list box Choices are
122. RP Parameter Settings on Switch A Active iv Name Examplei Network 192 168 1 1 24 Virtual Router ID 1 x Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode Vv Priority f 10 Uplink Gateway 172 21 1 100 Primary Virtual IP 192 168 1 20 Secondary Virtual IP 0 0 0 0 Figure 108 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B Active Vv Name Examplei Network 192 168 10 1 24 Virtual Router ID 1 j Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode Vv Priority joo Uplink Gateway 2211100 Primary Virtual IP 32168120 Secondary Virtual IP nono After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Chapter 31 VRRP 196 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 109 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A VRRP Status Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Figure 110 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch B ONL Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive 31 5 2 Two Subnets Example The following figure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic Hosts in the two network groups use different default gateways Each switch is configured to backup a virtual router using VRRP You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup
123. Select Simple and set the Key field to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using simple password authentication Select MD5 and set the Key ID and Key fields to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use 167 Chapter 25 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 60 OSPF Interface continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long Characters after the eighth character will be ignored When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Cost The interface cost is used for calculating the routing table Enter a number between 0 and 65535 Add Click Add to apply the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number for an interface Network This field displays the IP interface information Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authentication This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD
124. Serv Activate DiffServ to allow the switch to enable DiffServ and apply marking rules and IEEE802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 92 DiffServ auccm DSCP Setting Active r Port A O c yoann amp why 11 12 SIXSINXINSXINXSIN XXE Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the switch Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the port 181 Chapter 29 Differentiated Services GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 66 DiffServ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again 29 3 DSCP to IEEE802 1p Priority Mapping You can configure the DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping to allow the switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1P mapping Table 67 Default DSCP IEEE802 1p Mapping 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 DSCP VALUE IEEE802 1P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 29 3 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To chang
125. Table of Contents 12 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Chapter 24 BEES audisti PRADA DURER EORR EE ERE PAR la dS CR RUE ER DE FE DEE AV LAN DEK EEUS FM ENR 158 20 We coelos aai dace edna pes vote sefi cpu oA VI Deda 158 Bei M M 158 Chapter 25 ocu 160 VINE Ue aes ad nit T LU S T uence 160 25 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas sese 160 25 L2 How OSPF WANS Luise nitas tete ec i epe lateat aq enda 161 25 1 3 Interfaces and Virtual LINKS 25i cer e Ert Ine ERE FREI te aaa 161 25 1 4 Configi nwg OSPE 1 ieicuidiseces rici nin vandeduardenanadayeeuanaadevevenss 161 Zo XUI PE ANUS ausibsshipestutiod diae Wieden AS 162 25 3 Enabling OSPF and General Settings cesses epe bX P XRNE ER riv RR KHEN DEKOR DPIRUA 163 254 Coniiguning OSPF PRES sasixnptasarubetaiadatcaa vidit Ha ea ad dad d dope 165 25 4 1 Viewing OSPF Area Information Table sssssseeeees 166 25 5 Configuring OSPF Interfaces Liusssccssc ceste ete habeat tbt ni 167 200 OSPF yM CHK sain a i a tea soe od Ba cent enar 168 Chapter 26 IB MES ci cade C EE EROS EUM E ERE AVE RRR UEFA MIR REEFULU RE ERMUE ER E REG DUI UR 172 V WEeS ui ES ET o UU TETUER 172 E OT aa A 172 Chapter 27 a E P T na M E GHI P E A T E A TEMERE 174 PORA ET TM 174 21 2 HOw DYMRP WOS uesciseicnisenqien den tvi ei rub REY lent S ERkTE E ReE e pr e LER es de
126. Table uiii peto pet EE Erde dE HR 4 SE A 232 Chapter 39 Rounng Tab ciconia AY dau ERE REA ERR UP Quid a SUE AM REI RAK MUTA EIE NERA RNQRARMEE 234 SU T CVM ast cere tnt edu miu Eire 234 39 2 Viewing Ihe Routing Table 15 tren pA Ee bM EE he REEFER PH HER HEISE ren ER pae 234 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands essen nennt 236 BEN M NE T S D tne epaagian ieee 236 40 1 1 Switch Configuration File 124 22 eoe rero treten ttn entne 236 pA POS SUN Ve MUN t PRICE 236 2062 1 Pieces PIONO cas nicraap nuatiimahiigaaseteseedi eaten 237 SES Tho Conso POR uuo oper ori o obere eme a 237 402 21 NAN SOEBEN S o i waded aiia aaia nd aiaia 237 POE ID m 237 MOSS WHS LOGI SONS M 238 40 4 Command Syntax Conventions amp 5ocissckekes e eerbrEe asap DE Qu Ce UNSER RHRUDI SUN EHE UR 238 40 5 Gotling Help T aa 239 40 5 1 List of Available Commands sssssssssssseeee eene 239 40 5 2 Detailed Command Information sss 240 AUD Command ISOS cca 240 40 7 Using Command HIStory MEM camdaaneaneanaae 241 40 8 Saving Your COnfIgBl atiDlt iuuiisecceeus iie ener ridere niaii 241 LO NEST Relig tp a lat anracen i ea neena Aiea rea ea 242 20 9 Command Wna ceni CERE RR REP Pe REEL RN e ron x hau uS 242 4001 User MOJE e 242 YE ENADE MOGE M ionako EE Aa E AARE A N DEA OEA 243 40 9
127. This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 142 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL MENU Basic Setting Status A Logout H Help ES 4024AJES 40244 Member Menu Advanced Application IP Application Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Manageme S WYERECDSOT YS A VLAN Static Routing Maintenance 4 General Setup Static MAC Forward RIP Diagnostic Switch Setup Filtering IGMP MAC Table Maintenance Patsetp Bandwidth Contol gt DSE ARP Tabl ort Setu andwidth Contro able bee hii Broadcast Storm Control Routing Table Diagnostic Mirroring DHCP Server Status Cluster Management Link Aggregation Port Status MAC Table Port Authentication IP Table Port Security ARP Table Routing Table Access Control Classifier 35 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Chapter 35 Cluster Management 224 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 143 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch C NV ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 47 52 1970 User 192 168 1 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in
128. User s Guide Figure 138 Access Control Remote Management LSS oe Access Control Secured Client Setup Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP Web ICMP SNMP 1 Vv 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Vv Vv Vv iv Vv 2 Li 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DL DL a C E 3 C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C Dn O LH O 4 E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 O O O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Access Control Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address Switch The switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the switch from the specified trusted Web ICMP computers SNMP Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 33 Access Control 218 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 219 Chapter 33 Access Con
129. VID DVMRP cannot be enabled on the same VLAN group across different IP routing domains that is you cannot have duplicate VIDs for different DVMRP configurations see Figure 88 on page 177 Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on this IP routing domain Apply Click Apply to save these changes to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh 27 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages You must have IGMP RIP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in the next figure Figure 86 DVMRP IGMP RIP Not Set Error a Xzcdm Error IGMP should be turned on before setting DVMRP Back When you disable IGMP but DVMRP is still active you also see another warning screen Figure 87 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error Nic Warning DVMRP is still enabled DVMRP will not function if IGMP is turned off Back Each IP routing domain DVMRP configuration must be in a different VLAN group otherwise you see the following screen Chapter 27 DVMRP 176 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 88 DVMRP Duplicate VID Error Message Eror Error The VID has been used by other routing domain in VRRP Settings 27 4 Default DVMRP Timer Values The following are some default DVMRP timer values These may be changed using line commands Please see the commands chapter later in this User s Guide Table 64
130. a0 01 01 04 00 a0 c5 5e df f8 00 85 a0 01 01 00 Type dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic static dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 233 Chapter 38 ARP Table GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 39 Routing Table This chapter introduces the routing table 39 1 Overview The routing table contains the route information to the network s that the switch can reach The switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from other Ethernet devices 39 2 Viewing the Routing Table Click Management Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 150 Routing Table Status c ONITSDDEREUDEICUTIENNNNS Index Destination Gateway Interface Metric Type 1 192 158 1 0 24 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 1 STATIC 2 10 10 10 0 24 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 1 1 STATIC The following
131. adcast packets the interface receives per second An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable broadcast control Set the number of broadband packets the interface receives per second Figure 181 broadcast limit Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 ras config interface broadcast limit ras config interface broadcast limit 21 41 8 5 bandwidth limit Syntax bandwidth limit bandwidth limit egress Mbps bandwidth limit ingress Mbps where Enables bandwidth control on the switch Mbps Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic egress or incoming traffic ingress on the switch An example is shown next Enable port one for configuration Enable bandwidth control Set the outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 7Mbps Set the incoming traffic bandwidth limit to 9Mbps Figure 182 bandwidth limit Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 ras config interface bandwidth limit ras config interface bandwidth limit egress 7 ras config interface bandwidth limit ingress 9 281 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 8 6 mirror Syntax mirror mirror dir ingress egress both where Enables port mirroring on the interface ingress egress both Enables port mirroring for incoming outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic Port mirroring copies traffic f
132. al 1 264 1 280 1 264 i 896 Normal The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the switch for identification purposes ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the switch s current firmware including the Version date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the switch Address Hardware Monito r Temperature The switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature MAC CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature in degrees centigrade at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table8 System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fan Speed A properly f
133. allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANS to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 21 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 138 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 61 VLAN Stacking Example A VLAN 24 N s 1 N A 37 24 B 48 24 N E VLAN 24 VLAN 24 B 21 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s e
134. an id size lt 0 8024 t where ip The IP address of an Ethernet device in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the pandi Yran sylan id gt Ethernet device belongs out of band refers the management port while in band means the other ports on the switch size lt 0 8024 gt Specifies the packet size to send St 2 Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefinitely Click CTRL C to terminate the Ping process This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device The following example sends Ping requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Figure 165 ping Command Example ras ping 192 168 1 100 sent rcvd rate rot avg mdev max min reply from HE 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 2 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 3 3 100 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 100 ras Chapter 41 Command Examples 272 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 4 traceroute Syntax traceroute ip in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl 1 2555 wait 1 60 queries lt 1 10 gt where ip The IP address of an Ethernet device in band out of Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the Dard wan vlan Ethernet device belongs id ttl lt 1 255 gt Specifies the Time To Live TTL period wait lt 1 60 gt Specifies the time period to wait quesries lt 1 10 gt Specifies how many
135. and to display detailed help information about the sub commands and parameters Figure 155 CLI Help Detailed Command Information Example 1 ras ping help Commands available ping ip lt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size 0 1472 Lt ras Figure 156 CLI Help Detailed Command Information Example 2 ras ping ip destination ip address help Description of ping help 40 6 Command Modes There are three CLI command modes User Enable and Configure When you first log into the CLI the initial command mode is the User mode The User mode commands are a subset of the Enable mode commands The User mode command prompt ends with an angle bracket 7 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 240 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide To enter Enable or privileged mode type enable and enter a password when prompted the default is 1234 When you enter the Enable mode the command prompt changes to the pound sign 4 To enter the configuration mode type configure or config The Configure mode command prompt consists of the word config and the pound sign 4 There are various sub configuration modes interface router and VLAN To enter config vlan mode type v1an followed by a number between 1 to 4094 For example enter vlan 10 to configure settings for VLAN 10 To enter config interface mode and configure the ports enter interface port channel followed
136. and out of band vlan lt vlan id gt ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt Determines the path a packet takes to a device help Displays help information for this command 40 9 2 Enable Mode The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode Table 94 Command Summary Enable Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION baudrate Sets the console port baud rate 112131415 1 38400 7 2 19200 3 9600 4 57600 5 115200 boot config lt index gt Restarts the system with the specified configuration file configure Accesses Configuration mode See Section 40 9 3 on page 247 copy running config tftp Backs up running configuration to the lt ip gt lt remote file gt specified TFTP server with the specified file name tftp config ip Restores configuration with the specified remote file filename from the specified TFTP server flash ip Restores firmware via TFTP lt remote file gt disable Exits Enable or privileged mode enable Accesses Enable or privileged mode erase running config Resets to the factory default settings exit Exits Enable or privileged mode help Displays help information history Displays a list of command s that you have previously executed igmp flush Removes all IGMP information kick lt tcp session gt Disconnects the specified TCP session logout Exits Enable or privileged mode mac flush
137. and associating the profile to a port 22 1 3 IGMP Snooping A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them Chapter 22 Multicast 144 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping to ports that are members of that group The switch discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch 22 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications and Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information Figure 63 Multicast Status c OMESTI Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that bel
138. as 32 is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 108 Natural Masks CLASS NATURAL MASK A 255 0 0 0 B 255 255 0 0 C 255 255 255 0 Subnetting With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the left most bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits 313 IP Subnetting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all po
139. atically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 12 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 13 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 46 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 14 Transceiver Removal Example a c 3 2 Rear Panel The following figure shows the rear panel of the switch The rear panel contains the ventilation holes a connector for external backup power supply BPS the power receptacle and the power switch for DC model The following figure shows the rear panel of the switch The rear panel contains a connector for backup power supply BPS and the power receptacle Figure 15 Rear Panel GS 4012F Figure 17 Read Panel GS 4012F DC Model 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel The GS 4012F DC unit requires DC power supply input of 48 VDC or 60 VDC 1 2A Max To connect the power to the switch insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to a power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans 47 Chapter 3 Hardwa
140. aximum age lt 6 40 gt forward delay lt 4 30 gt Sets Hello Time Maximum Age and Forward Delay help Displays help information 259 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued ip 1024 ssh rsa ssh dsa key COMMAND DESCRIPTION priority lt 0 61440 gt Sets the bridge priority of the switch ssh known hosts host Adds a remote host to which the Switch can access using SSH service storm control Enables broadcast storm control on the switch time lt Hour Min Sec gt Sets the time in hour minute and second format date lt month day Sets the date in year month year gt and day format help Displays help information timezone lt Selects the time difference 1200 1200 gt between UTC formerly known as GMT and your time zone timesync lt daytime time ntp gt Sets the time server protocol server lt ip gt Sets the IP address of your time server trunk T1 T2 T3 TA T5 T6 Activates a trunk group T1 T2 JT3 TA T5 T6 1 Enables LACP for a trunk acp group T1 T2 T3 TA4 T5 T6 i Adds a port s to the specified nterface lt port list gt trunk group interface port Defines the port number and list timeout lacp LACP timeout period timeout vlan lt 1 4094 gt Enters the VLAN configuration mode See Section 40 9 6 on page 265 for
141. bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in megabits per second Mbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Enter a number between 1 and 1000 Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 105 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 13 Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Overview Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port 13 2 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Click Advanced Application Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 45 Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast Storm Contro Active O Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s 1 pl oe oe rb rb rb 3 rp of of rd rp SA 5 ob ob of 3 rb r5 rp rb rh ch j rb rh rh i rb
142. ber 81 VLAN Stacking 33 138 VLAN trunking 91 vlan1q port accept 292 vlan1q port gvrp 293 vlan1q svlan active 295 vlan1q svlan delentry 294 vlan1q svlan inactive 295 vlan1gq svlan list 295 vlan1q svlan setentry 293 VRID Virtual Router ID 191 VRRP 190 Advertisement interval 193 Authentication 193 Backup router 190 Configuration example 195 Hello message 193 How it works 190 Interface setup 192 Master router 190 Network example 190 195 Parameter 193 Preempt mode 193 194 325 Index GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Priority 193 194 Status 191 Uplink gateway 194 Uplink status 191 Virtual IP 194 Virtual router 190 Virtual Router ID 194 VRID 191 W Web configuration Screen summary 53 Web configurator Getting help 58 Home 51 Login 50 Logout 57 Navigation panel 52 Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ Weight 136 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 135 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 203 ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 5 Index 326
143. bled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays a descriptive name of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface VRID This field displays the ID number of a virtual router Primary VIP This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router Uplink Gateway This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway Priority This field displays the priority level 1 to 255 of the entry Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 31 5 VRRP Configuration Examples The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the switch 31 5 1 One Subnet Network Example The figure below shows a simple VRRP network with only one virtual router VR1 VRID 1 and two switches The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G 172 21 1 100 The host computer X is set to use VRI as the default gateway 195 Chapter 31 VRRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 106 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network 192 168 1 1 SERA mmmg 172 21 1 1 A Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 VRID 7 1 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 10 Wye 172 21 1 10 GEE You want to set switch A as the master router Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 107 VRRP Example 1 VR
144. by a port number For example interface port channel 10 To configure the routing domain enter interface route domain followed by the domain IP address and subnet mask bits for example interface route domain 192 168 1 1 24 Use the router commands to configure the routing protocol settings Enter exit or logout to quit from the current mode or log out from the CLI 40 7 Using Command History The switch keeps a list of up to 256 commands you have entered for the current CLI session You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up 4 or down arrow key to scroll through the previously used commands and press ENTER Use the history command to display the list of commands Figure 157 CLI History Command Example ras history enable exit show ip history ras 40 8 Saving Your Configuration After you set the switch settings with the configuration commands use the write memory command to save the changes permanently Figure 158 CLI write memory ras write memory 241 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Note The write memory command is not available in User mode You must save your changes after each CLI session All unsaved configuration changes are lost once you restart the switch 40 8 1 Logging Out In User mode enter the exit or 1ogout command to log out of the CLI 40 9 Command Summary The following sections summarize the c
145. ch this DHCP settings apply Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address Client Pool Size This field displays the size of the DHCP client IP address pool Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to end status polling 30 3 Configuring DHCP Server Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel Click the Server link In the DHCP Server Status screen that displays 185 Chapter 30 DHCP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 95 DHCP Server ED DHCP Server Status VID 9 z Client IP Pool Starting Address booo Size of Client IP Pool IP Subnet Mask opo Default Gateway booo Primary DNS Server ono Secondary DNS Server pono Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 2 Server 10 10 10 100 100 rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 DHCP Server LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Client IP Pool Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Specify the size or count of the IP address pool Pool IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the DHCP server
146. cified policy related information port access authenticator Displays all port authentication settings port list Displays port authentication settings on the specified port s port security Displays all port security settings port list Displays port security settings on the specified port s radius server Displays RADIUS server settings remote management Displays all secured client information index Displays the specified secured client information router dvmrp Displays DVMRP settings igmp Displays global IGMP settings ospf Displays OSPF settings ospf area Displays OSPF area settings ospf network Displays OSPF network or interface settings ospf redistribute Displays OSPF redistribution settings ospf virtual link Displays OSPF virtual link settings rip Displays global RIP settings vrrp Displays VRRP settings running config Displays current operating configuration service control Displays service control settings snmp server Displays SNMP settings spanning tree config Displays Spanning Tree Protocol STP settings ssh Displays general SSH settings Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 246 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 94 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION known hosts Displa
147. cksum This field displays the checksum value of the LSA Link Count This field displays the number of links in the LSA 25 3 Enabling OSPF and General Settings To activate OSPF and set general settings click IP Application OSPF and the Configuration link to display the OSPF Configuration screen 163 Chapter 25 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 78 OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings Index Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP 1 z Static 2 fi gt Name nam Area ID pono Authentication None Stub Network E No Summary O Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete Interface Virtual Link Status Router ID iv Apply Cancel Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The follow table describes the related labels in this screen Table 57 OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active OSPF is disabled by default Select this option to enable it Router ID Router ID uniquely identifies the switch in an OSPF Enter a unique ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation for the switch Redistribute Route Route redistribution allows your switch to import and translate external routes learned through other routing protocols RIP and Static into the OSPF network transparently Active Select this option to activate route red
148. ckuping 683 Bytes Done ras 41 6 2 Configuration Restoration Syntax copy tftp config lt index gt lt ip gt lt remote file gt where lt index gt Specifies to restore which configuration file 1 or 2 on the switch lt ip gt The IP address of a TFTP server from which you want to get the backup configuration file lt remote file gt Specified the name of the configuration file Chapter 41 Command Examples 274 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide This command restores a configuration file on the switch The following example uploads the configuration file test c g from the TFTP server 172 23 19 96 to the switch Figure 169 CLI Restore Configuration Example ras copy tftp config 1 172 23 19 96 test cfg Restoring 683 Bytes Done ras 41 6 3 Using a Different Configuration File You can store up to two configuration files on the switch Only one configuration file is used at a time By default the switch uses the first configuration file with an index number of 1 You can set the switch to use a different configuration file There are two ways in which you can set the switch to use a different configuration file restart the switch cold reboot and restart the system warm reboot Use the boot config command to restart the switch and use a different configuration file 1f specified The following example restarts the switch to use the second configuration file Figure 170 CLI boot
149. cluster memeber password lt password str name cluster name Sets a descriptive name for the cluster rcommand mac Logs into the CLI of the address specified cluster member default in band out of Specifies through which traffic management band flow the switch is to send packets Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 248 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION dhcp relay Enables DHCP relay helper address Sets the IP addresses of up to 3 remote dhcp DHCP servers serverl gt lt remote dhcp server2 remote dhcp server3 information Allows the switch to add system name to agent information option Allows the switch to add DHCP relay agent information Server vlan id starting address lt ip addr gt lt subnet mask gt lt size of client gt diffserv Enables DiffServ dscp lt 0 63 gt priority Sets the DSCP to IEEE 802 1q 0 7 mappings exit Exits from the CLI garp join lt 100 65535 gt Configures GARP time settings leave msec leaveall lt msec gt help Displays help information history Displays a list of previous command s that you have executed hostname name string Sets the switch s name for B identification purposes https cert regeneration Re generates a certificate lt rsa dsa gt timeout lt 0 65535 gt Sets the HTTPS timeout period
150. config Command Example ras boot config 2 Use the reload config command to restart the system and use a different configuration file if specified The following example restarts the system to use the second configuration file Figure 171 CLI reload config Command Example rast reload config 2 Note When you use the write memory command without specifying a configuration file index number the switch saves the changes to the configuration file the switch is currently using 41 6 4 Resetting to the Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults 1 Enter erase running config to reset the current running configuration 2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current configuration file If you want to reset the second configuration file use the write memory command again with the specified index number 275 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings Figure 172 CLI Reset to the Factory Default Example vas erase running config rast write memory rast write memory 2 41 7 no Command Examples These are the commonly used command examples that belong to the no group of commands 41 7 1 no mirror port Syntax no mirror port Disables port mirroring on the switch An example is shown next Figure 173 no mirror port Command Example
151. configuring VRRP first create an IP interface or routing domain in the IP Setup screen see the Section 7 7 on page 79 for more information Click IP Application VRRP and click the Configuration link to display the VRRP Configuration screen as shown next Note You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs Routing domains with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table indicated Figure 103 VRRP Configuration IP Interface Network 1 192 168 1 10 24 Authentication None v Apply Cancel Status Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Adertisement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP Index Active Name 1 Yes Example hame OAZE E a Iv fron poop poop poop Add Cancel Clear Network VRID Primary VIP 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 168 1 1 Delete Cancel Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 192 168 1100 110 O The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 31 VRRP 192 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 73 VRRP Configuration IP Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain Authentication Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to use a simple passwo
152. d Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next 99 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 42 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Costto Bridge Port ID Polling Interval Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol Running Forwarding Delay second Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change 40 Set Interval Stop Configuration Root Our Bridge 8000 00a0c5feea71 8000 00a0c5feea71 2 2 20 20 15 15 0 0x0000 0 00 12 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Spanning Tree Protocol Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree This field displays Running if STP is activated Otherwise it displays Down Protocol Configuration Click Configuration to configure STP settings Refer to Section 11 2 1 on page 101 Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this switch This switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwa
153. d and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN tagged lt port list gt Sets the port s to untag VLAN tags receiver port Sets the receiver port s An MVR lt port list gt receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN source port Sets the source port s An MVR lt port list gt source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN tagged port Sets the port s to tag VLAN tags list 267 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 41 Command Examples This chapter describes some commands in more detail 41 1 Overview These are commands that you may use frequently in maintaining your switch 41 2 show Commands These are the commonly used show commands 41 2 1 show system information Syntax show system information This command shows the general system information such as the firmware version and system up time An example is shown next Figure 159 show system information Command Example ras show system information System Name System Contact System Location Ethernet Address 00 13 49 10 a2 9 ZyNOS F W Version V3 60 TS 2 10 11 2005 RomRasSize 3430448 System up Time 3 18 31 122ce8 ticks Bootbase Version V3 0 04 08 2005 ras Chapter 41 Command Examples 268 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 2 2 show hardware monitor Syntax show hardware moni
154. d anes 174 27 21 DVMISP Terminology si tc ode bie Lec Sun Teak e bbb haad ce Pronto 175 21 9 Conan DIES senna aA 175 27 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages esee 176 2 4 Default DVMRP Timer Vales iuis imer obarkS Pase PEL E ER EXE OUR EE Aaaa Eae unc e Ea rte 177 Chapter 28 LP Ui 178 26 1 COMED D 178 Vedere IUe PREND TE TU 178 Chapter 29 Blgi ticpeEcau c 180 CN PI uU UE D Um UE TE 180 20 1 1 BSCP and Per Hop Be havior 1 rr rr RE eet d po cR enda 180 29 1 2 DSen Network Example 1 rrt pita or ERR reEE EH IS Ero pUI e EM ERERUE 180 13 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 292 POUND UTES A c 181 29 3 DS6P IoJEEERUZ Tp Priority Mapping ascsuiseercconee oett ELEHP d veni in E ht 182 28 3 1 Configunng DOSCP Seige uussascossesrepeti a surdevG eve ve obi s Hr Ea pra dir espe 182 Chapter 30 p e M 184 SUMUS Dis OAE E N A NR Ere EE 184 CUWEEP c eme em 184 aU 2 DHCP Serratus qu eio tem a p Cea a diet ous 184 30 3 Configuring DHCP WE 185 30 3 1 DHCP Server Configuration Example eeeeeceeeeen ene 187 TE DAOP m 187 30 4 1 DACP Relay Agent Information 225r rette tat Eres xac ekEnpn UR ERER DD CE GE ERHMIS 188 30 4 2 Comiguring DACP Relay 22 corte perte strada disk titt isorinis 188
155. ded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to form network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet Table 111 Subnet 1 NETWORK NUMBER DUE BI IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 112 Subnet 2 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 The remaining 7 bits determine the number of hosts each subnet can have Host IDs of all Zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 27 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 25
156. deter rd erbe p eO ra 272 Figure 166 traceroute Command Example sesseesssseeesssnsnsesrreeesrnnnneernrneernennnnsennne 273 Figure 167 Enable RSTP Command Example cicer trita 274 23 List of Figures GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 168 CLI Backup Configuration Example eeeeeeeceeeeeeeee 274 Figure 169 CLI Restore Configuration Example eeeeeseeseeeeeceeennn enn 275 Figure 170 CLI boot config Command Example sees 275 Figure 171 CLI reload config Command Example eese 275 Figure 172 CLI Reset to the Factory Default Example eeeeeessss 276 Figure 173 no mirrar port Command Example 1 ssec tta oet renta 276 Figure 174 no https timeout Command Example sss 276 Figure 175 no trunk Command Example s errtiid o eekvI D FE FE E put EFFEPA MER FFERUU M MEKERRIES 277 Figure 176 no port access authenticator Command Example 278 Figure 177 no ssh Command Example 2 2 seed Doe Lei ath h a ta pa 278 Figure 178 interface Command Example crier ttt eet t ttti tette 279 Figure 179 interface Command Example 0 cccccceeseccneseeeseccnseeeesecenseseeeccneeeeees 280 Figure 180 interface bpdu control Command Example ssssssss 280 Figure 181 broadcast limit Command Example eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenne 281 Figure 182 bandwidth limit Command Examp
157. dge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel 21 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 42 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID 139 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPID Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure Ifthe VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel then the switch only adds the SP TPID ta
158. ds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the switch the time and date will be reset to 2000 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group Wit
159. dth 12 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application and then Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control 104 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 44 Bandwidth Control OLA Active O Port Active mig US MD Egress Rate Commit Rate Peak Rate 1 m n Kbps on Kbps on Kbps 2 D Eo Kbps on Kbps io Kbps 3 Oo COo i Kbps ficoo Kbps hoo Kbps 4 DO A Kbps foo Kbps foo Kbps 5 D i Kbps ioo Kbps fion Kbps 6 Dn ho Kbps hooo Kbps hoo Kbps 7 El Kbps ioo Kbps ion Kbps 8 Im Ea Kbps fiooo Kbps on Kbps g E zz Kbps fon Kbps fon Kbps 10 m It kops i000 kops 000 Kbps 11 E Eo J Kbps hoo Kbps 1000 Kbps 12 O n 1j Kbps ioo Kbps 1000 Kbps Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 24 Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the switch Port This field displays the port number Active Make sure to select this check box to activate bandwidth control on a port Commited Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the Rate incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Peak Rate Specify the maximum
160. e Displays the DVMRP routes igmp Displays the IGMP setting iptable all Displays the IP address table You can IP VID PORT sort the table based on the IP address VLAN ID or the port number iptable static Displays the statis IP address table ospf database Displays OSPF link state database information ospf interface Displays OSPF interface settings ospf neighbor Displays OSPF neighbor information route Displays IP routing information route static Displays IP static route information tcp Displays IP TCP information udp Displays IP UDP information lacp Displays LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol settings logging Displays system logs loginPrecedence Displays login precedence settings logins Displays login account information mac address table Displays MAC address table lt all You can sort by MAC address VID or mac vid port gt port address table Displays static MAC address table static 245 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 94 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION mac aging time Displays MAC learning aging time mac count Displays the count of MAC addresses learnt multicast Displays multicast settings multi login Displays multi login information mvr Displays all MVR settings VID Displays the specified MVR group settings policy Displays all policy related information name Displays the spe
161. e and date from an external server when you turn on your switch The real time is then displayed in the switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 7 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Chapter 7 Basic Setting 72 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 28 System Info Et Temperature Unit C Temperature C MAC CPU PHY FAN Speed RPM FAN FAN2 FANS Voltage V 2 5 1 25 Ks 12 5 4 3 1 25 Poll Interval s xcu HE System Name ZyNOS FAW Version Hardware Monitor ao Set Interval Stop V3 60 TS 2 09 26 2005 hernet Address 00 13 49 1c a2 9f Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 35 0 35 0 27 0 55 0 Normal 33 0 33 0 27 0 55 0 ormal 33 5 33 5 27 0 55 0 ormal Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 5670 5716 5536 2750 Normal 5625 5625 5493 2750 Normal 4815 4951 4750 2750 ormal Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 2 592 2 592 2 592 i 896 Normal 1 280 1 280 1 264 i 896 Normal 3 376 3 376 3 376 i 896 Normal 12 281 12 281 12 281 i 1096 Normal 5 053 5 053 5 053 i 7 ormal 1 328 1 328 1 328 i 10 orm
162. e port s lt pkt s gt Sets how many broadcast packets the interface receives per second dlf limit Enables the Destination Lookup Failure DLF limit lt pkt s gt Sets the interface DLF limit in packets per second pps egress set port list gt Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port based VLAN exit Exits from the interface port channel command mode flow control Enables interface flow control Flow control regulates transmissions to match the bandwidth of the receiving port frame type lt all tagged gt Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port 261 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 96 interface port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION gvrp Enables this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch help Displays a description of the interface port channel commands igmp filtering profile lt profile gt Applies the specified IGMP filtering profile igmp group limit Enables the IGMP group limiting feature number lt number gt Sets the maximum number IGMP groups allowed igmp immediate leave Enables the IGMP immidiate leave function igmp querier mode auto fixed edge Sets the IGMP query mode for the port inactive Disables the specified port s
163. e remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products 5 ZyXEL Limited Warranty GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you
164. e switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 85 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member Switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 140 Clustering Application Example s FPuEEEBERHEERYV Chapter 35 Cluster Management 222 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 35 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 141 Cluster Management Status c Clustering Management Status Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 a0 5 d4 88 bf The Number Of Member 2 Index MacAddr Name Model Status T 00 a0 c5 01 23 45 ES 4024A ES 4024A Online 2 00 a0 c5 5f a2 b9 ES 3024 ES 3024 Online The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this switch within the cluster Manager Member you se
165. e the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 93 DiffServ DSCP Setting OPES EMEND Diffserv DSCP to 802 1p Mapping o 0 gt 1 0 gt foz foz 4 o gt soz ooz 0z te Te ote mts he cpm T tts 16 2 v 17 2 18 2 v 19 2 20 2 v 21 2 22 2 23 2 v 24 3 7 25 3 7 26 3 v 27 3 28 3 7 29 3 v 30 3 31 3 32 4 7 33 4 v 34 4 v 35 4 v 36 4 v 37 4 v 38 4 v 39 4 v 40 5 45 42 5 v 43 5 v 44 5 v 45 5 v 46 5 v 475v 48 6 49 6 50 6 v 51 6 52 6 v safe gt 54 6 v 55 6 56 57 v 58 v 59 v 60 61 62 631 7 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 29 Differentiated Services 182 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 68 DiffServ DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again 183 Chapter 29 Differentiated Services GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 30 DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 30 1 Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at sta
166. e the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Address Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Prefix Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field Number before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to save the changes Chapter 18 Classifier 124 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 34 Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 18 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule Figure 55 Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 O Delete Cancel The followi
167. e this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 142 on page 224 HwAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 223 Chapter 35 Cluster Management GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 35 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page
168. e to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application 1 4 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 8 VLAN on page 84 1 4 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 38 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 4 Tag based VLAN Application pummmmmmmmmmmm 1 4 4 2 VLAN Shared Server Example Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server as shown in the following example In this example only ports that need access to the server need belong to VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example lt gt S grn rA L L E
169. een Table 12 Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name up to nine printable characters that identifies this port Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports or 1000M for the mini GBIC ports Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases p
170. entions The rules of the commands are listed next The command keywords are in courier new font The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt for instance ping ip means that you must specify an IP number for this command The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets for instance configure snmp server contact system contact location system location gt means that the contact and location fields are optional Command refers to a command used in the command line interface CI command e The symbol means or Theentry cr inthe command lines refers to carriage return Press ENTER or carriage return after a command to execute the command e Use the up 4 or down arrow key to scroll through the command history list The CLI does not accept partial or incomplete commands You may enter a unique part of a command and press TAB to have the switch automatically display the full command For example if you enter config and press TAB the full command of configure automatically displays Each interface refers to an Ethernet port on the switch Commands configured after the interface command correspond to those ports Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 238 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 40 5 Getting
171. erature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F https Displays the HTTPS information certificate Displays the HTTPS certificates key lt rsa dsa gt Displays the HTTPS key session Displays current HTTPS session s timeout Displays the HTTPS session timeout igmp filtering profile name Displays IGMP filtering profile settings igmp snooping Displays global IGMP snooping settings interface port number Displays current interface status interfaces config lt port list gt Displays current interface configuration Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 244 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 94 Command Summary Enable Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION bandwidth Displays bandwidth control settings control bstorm control Displays broadcast storm control settings egress Displays outgoing port information igmp filtering Displays IGMP filtering settings igmp group Displays the IGMP group limit limited igmp immediate Displays the IGMP Immidiate Leave leave setting ip Displays IP related information arp Displays the ARP table dvmrp group Displays DVMRP group information dvmrp interface Displays DVMRP interface information dvmrp neighbour Displays DVMRP neighbour information dvmrp prune Displays the DVMRP prune information dvmrp rout
172. ermissions are allowed Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 298 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 43 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 43 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 43 2 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 204 Pop up Blocker Mail and News gt Pop up Blocker Turn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize fer ee Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled 299 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 205 Inte
173. es MD5 authentication for the area area lt area id gt default cost 0 65535 Sets the cost to the area area lt area id gt Sets a descriptive name for the name name area for identification purposes area area id Enables and sets the area as a stub stub area area area id stub no summary Sets the stub area not to send any LSA Link State Advertisement area area id virtual link router id Sets the virtual link ID information for the area Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 256 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION area area id Enables simple authentication virtual link and sets the authentication key router id for the specified virtual link in authentication the area key key area area id Sets the virtual link to use the virtual link same authentication method as router id the area authentication same as area area area id Enables MD5 authentication virtual link and sets the key ID and key for router id the virtual link in the area message digest key lt keyid gt md5 lt key gt area lt area id gt Sets a descriptive name for the virtual link virtual link for identification router id name Purposes lt name gt exit Leaves the router OSPF configuration mode network ip
174. estined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group The switch discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch 7 6 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 30 Switch Setup Switch Setup g 8021Q C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active VLAN Type r MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel7 7 evel6 ez evel5 5 evel4 4v evel3 3m evel2 fi evel1 fo evel 2 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen 7T Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 10 Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 84 for more info
175. et port test 220 Ethernet ports Default settings 45 Extended authentication protocol 116 External authentication server 116 F Fan speed 74 FCC Compliance 3 Feature Hardware 35 File Transfer using FTP command example 203 Filename convention 203 Filtering 96 Filtering database 228 Firmware 73 Upgrade 200 224 Flow control 82 Back pressure 82 IEEE802 3x 82 Front panel 44 FTP 203 File transfer procedure 204 Restrictions over WAN 205 G GARP 85 289 321 Index GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 85 garp status 290 GARP Status Command 290 GARP timer 78 85 General setup 74 Getting help 58 Gigabit Ethernet ports 45 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 76 GVRP 85 90 91 289 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 85 282 gvrp disable 292 gvrp enable 291 gvrp status 291 H Hardware installation 40 Hardware monitor 73 Hardware overview 44 Host IDs 312 How SSH works 211 HTTP 126 HTTPS 212 HTTPS Example 213 IEEE 802 1p 78 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 288 IEEE 802 1x 116 Activate 117 Note 116 Reauthentication 117 IGMP 34 172 174 Setup 172 Version 172 IGMP snooping 77 144 Ingress port 93 Installation Freestanding 40 Precautions 41 Rack mounting 41 Interface 161 162 167 Internal Router IR 160 Introduction 32 IP Addressing 312 IP Classes 312 IP interface 79 192 IP Ports 126 IP routing domain 79 IP setup 79 IP table 230 How it
176. etscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Web configurator screens are similar for the switch models described in this guide GS 4012F screens are shown 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the switch for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 50 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 18 Web Configurator Login aixi qe Please type your user name and password Site 182 168 1 1 Realm GS 4012F at Thu Jan 1 02 12 58 1970 User Name Password Save this password in your password list Cancel 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator
177. evice user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location Figure 49 RADIUS Server E zl Client RADIUS Server 16 2 Configuring Port Authentication For network security enable port authentication to check the identity of the user before access to the network is allowed The switch authenticates users against the remote RADIUS server you specify To enable port authentication activate IEEE802 1x security both on the switch and the port s configure the RADIUS server settings 2 Atthe time of writing only Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports it See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other operating systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software Chapter 16 Port Authentication 116 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Click Advanced Application Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 50 Port Authentication Fort Authentication RADIUS Click here 802 1x Click here 16 2 1 Activating IEEE 802 1x Security From the Port Authentication screen display the configuration screen as shown Figure 51 Port Authentication 802 1x DEJAD Active r Port Aut
178. example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy in the Policy screen to define action s on the classified traffic flow Chapter 18 Classifier 126 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 56 Classifier Example x Active M Name Exemple Packet Format AI M VLAN SN cf Priority Any c os Ethernet IP z Layer 2 Tyre C Others Hex Any Source Address MAC foo 50 ba fed a Ac Port Port2 x Destination Kec on Address C MAC E 8 8 E B DSCP ore of c all gt Establish Only IP Protocol o others Dec IP Pddressio n0 d Address eee Source Layers Prefix Socket Any Number C IP Address oon I 1 Address puno Destination Prefix Socket Any Number C Asa Conc cor 127 Chapter 18 Classifier GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules 19 1 Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 18 on page 122 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network 19 1 1 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatme
179. f2 192 168 v4 Link State Database OSPF Router with ID 192 168 1 10 Router Link States Area 0 0 0 0 Link ID DV Router Age Seq CkSum Link count X Poll Interval s ao Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 OSPF Status LABEL DESCRIPTION OSPF This field displays whether OSPF is activated Running or not Down Interface The text box displays the OSPF status of the interface s on the switch Neighbor The text box displays the status of the neighboring router participating in the OSPF network Link State The text box displays information in the link state database which contains data in the Database LSAs Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to end OSPF status polling Chapter 25 OSPF 162 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following table describes some common output fields Table 56 OSPF Status Common Output Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Interface Internet Address This field displays the IP address and subnet bits of an IP routing domain Area This field displays the area ID Router ID This field displays the unique ID of the switch Transm
180. faults and then wait for the switch to restart This takes up to two minutes If you want to access the switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default switch IP address 192 168 1 1 32 6 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the switch without physically turning the power off Follow the steps below to reboot the switch 1 In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Reboot System to display the next screen Figure 122 Reboot System Confirmation x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system Cancel 2 Click OK to display the screen shown next Chapter 32 Maintenance 202 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 123 Reboot System Start x AN rebooting please close this session then reconnect later 3 Click OK again and then wait for the switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the switch s configuration 32 7 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 32 7 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password switch setup IP Setup etc Once you have customized the switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Ne
181. following table describes the labels in this screen 92 Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 17 Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then
182. for virtual router VR2 On the other hand switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1 Figure 111 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network 192 168 1 1 VRID 7 1 192 168 1 20 eur a TIE 4 VRI F FA kanet C VRDS2 192 168 1 21 11 11 77 weeny rc G SA 4 VR2 17 172 21 1 100 Default Gateway 192 168 1 21 Keeping the VRRP configuration in example for virtual router VR1 refer to Section 31 5 2 on page 197 you need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2 on each switch Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures below Chapter 31 VRRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 112 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Advertisement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP Vv Example hz E Vv for 192 168 1 21 Boos Figure 113 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Advertisement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP Vv Example ira E Vv DN mzao fi 92 168 1 21 un After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the switches are shown next Figure 114 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch A VRRP Status screens for both ED VRRP S
183. for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 8 6 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen 91 Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 38 Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected All connected v Apply Setting Wizard Incoming Nn OO tT DO OR ESSERE ESSERS BEREAN o e n BEEBE BRB BBE aa Vv Vv Mw v M Mw v M iv iv Ww v Mw Mv n Mi iMi M eM Ww v MM M 12 M M Mw PM ceo iv iv iv iv bb gt o DEEEEE Dp ARDRE gt iv iv iv iv iv iv iv Vv Vv iv iv iv Iv iv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv N O tT OD oO KR Oo o0 Outgoing EEEE b BERE BERE Ls o 12 10 Apply Cancel Figure 39 Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Portisolation Apply Setting Wizard Incoming LLbELL LEELLL JI BILIILIILIILI 11 12 iv Vv 12 MESFNHSENENENEN ee CcPu Ww wv MMMM 10 iv Eni emt The
184. for routes which are external to an OSPF domain If you do not set a route cost no default route is added Add Click Add to apply the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 25 4 1 Viewing OSPF Area Information Table The bottom of the OSPF Configuration screen displays a summary table of all the OSPF areas you have configured Figure 80 OSPF Configuration Summary Table Index Name alk Example Area ID 192 168 1 1 Delete Cancel Authentication Stub Network Delete None No rH The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 59 OSPF Configuration Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an area Name This field displays the descriptive name of an area Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area An area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the backbone Authentication This field displays the authentication method used None Simple or MD5 Stub Network This field displays whether an area is a stub network Yes or not No Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes Chapter 25 OSPF 166 GS 4012F 4
185. for the clients If you disable the DHCP service you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 32 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router VLAN Stacking Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help s
186. ftp 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST Ww w Ww 1 owner group 3209434 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W w W 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf rw rw rw 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf 226 File sent OK ftp 463 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 463000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 350dul bin fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 87 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 350dul bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 35 3 Configuring Cluster Management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen 225 Chapter 35 Clu
187. g to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the switch then the switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the switch configure priority level of inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen e 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 21 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 43 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA _ Len Etype Data FCS Untagged Ethernet frame DA SA TPID Priority VID Len Etype Data FCS IEEE 802 1Q customer tagged frame DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len Etype Data FCS Double tagged frame Table 44 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Etype Length and type of Ethernet frame SP T
188. gistration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers OSPF OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF is best suited for large networks DVMRP DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 34 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or rou
189. gt Enables port security on the specified port s 255 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION learn inactive Disables MAC address learning on the specified port s address limit Limits the number of dynamic number MAC addresses that may be learned on a port queue level 0 7 priority Sets the priority level to 0 7 physical queue mapping radius server host ip acct port Sets the IP address of the lt socket number gt external RADIUS server UDP key lt key string gt port and shared key remote index start addr Specifies a group of trusted management ip end addr ip computer s from which an service administrator may use a service lt telnet ftp http to manage the switch icmp snmp gt router dvmrp Enables and enters the DVMRP configuration mode exit Leaves the DVMRP configuration mode threshold lt ttl Sets the DVMRP threshold value gt value igmp Enables and enters the IGMP configuration mode exit Leaves the IGMP configuration mode ospf lt router id gt Enables and enters the OSPF configuration mode area lt area id gt Enables and sets the area ID area lt area id gt authentication Enables simple authentication for the area area lt area id gt authentication message digest Enabl
190. gt Creates a new VLAN group exit Leaves the VLAN configuration mode fixed lt port list gt Specifies the port s to be a permanent member of this VLAN group forbidden port Specifies the port s you want to list prohibit from joining this VLAN group help Displays a list of available VLAN commands inactive Disables the specified VLAN ip address lt ip address gt lt mask gt Sets the IP address of the switch in the VLAN lt ip address gt lt mask gt manageable Sets the IP address of the switch in the VLAN and allow remote management to this IP address lt ip address gt default gateway Sets the default gateway IP address in this VLAN name lt name str gt Specifies a name for identification purposes no fixed lt port list gt Sets fixed port s to normal port s 265 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 98 Command Summary config vlan Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION forbidden port list Sets forbidden port s to normal port s inactive Enables the specified VLAN ip address lt ip address mask Deletes the IP address and subnet mask from this VLAN ip address default gateway Deletes the default gateway from this VLAN untagged port list Specifies the port s you want to tag all outgoing frames tra
191. h VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic Chapter 7 Basic Setting 76 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide See Chapter 8 on page 84 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 IGMP Snooping A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them The switch forwards multicast traffic d
192. hentication Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer On E E 3800 seconds 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 e seconds e seconds e seconds o 3 4 e seconds o 3 H e seconds e seconds o 3 H e seconds o 3 4 e seconds o E H e seconds o 3 4 e seconds DQimnmimindidimnm imnmnn o 3 4 e seconds 9 7o 3 o o 4 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Port Authentication 802 1x password to stay connected to the port LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and 117 Chapter 16 Port Authentication GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 31 Port Authentication 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay Timer connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back
193. ho can view but not configure switch settings Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen Figure 128 Access Control Logins Logins Access Control Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm a rr NENNEN NNNMZMSMk gg r a nm d d 3 d AMEN NNNM NENNEN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Access Control Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These people have read only access User Name Set a user name up to 30 characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring
194. hooting Accessing the Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot access the Switch using Telnet Make sure the ports are properly connected You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled Telnet service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details cannot access the web configurator The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password If you have configured more than one IP interface make sure another administrator is NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same account Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details Your computer s and the switch s IP addresses must be on the same subnet See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java p
195. htning Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Do NOT store things on the device Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Interference Statements and Warnings 4 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product 1s free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusiv
196. ice of where the traffic is going 29 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 90 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits DS 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 29 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a simple DiffServ network consisting of a group of contiguous DiffServ compliant network devices Chapter 29 Differentiated Services 180 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 91 DiffServ Network Example Switch A marks traffic flowing into the network based on the configured marking rules Intermediary network devices 1 and 2 allocate network resources such as bandwidth by mapping the DSCP values and the associated policies 29 2 Activating Diff
197. iew See the VLAN chapter for more information on VLANs There are two kinds of tagging 1 Explicit Tagging A VLAN identifier is added to the frame header that identifies the source VLAN 2 Implicit Tagging The MAC Media Access Control number the port or other information is used to identify the source of a VLAN frame The IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN uses both explicit and implicit tagging Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per LAN per port basis recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame otherwise it is transmitted as an untagged frame 42 2 VLAN Databases A VLAN database stores and organizes VLAN registration information useful for switching frames to and from a switch A VLAN database consists of a static entries Static VLAN or SVLAN table and dynamic entries Dynamic VLAN or DVLAN table 42 2 1 Static Entries SVLAN Table Static entry registration information is added modified and removed by administrators only Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 288 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 42 2 2 Dynamic Entries DVLAN Table Dynamic entries are learned by the switch and cannot be created or updated by administrators The switch learns this information by observing what port source address and VLAN ID or VID is associated with a frame Entrie
198. igmp filtering Enables IGMP filtering on the switch profile lt name gt start address lt ip gt end address lt ip gt Sets the range of multicast address es in a profile igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping unknown multicast frame drop flooding Sets how to treat traffic from unknown multicast group interface port channel lt port Enables a port or a list of ports list for configuration See Section 40 9 4 on page 261 for more details 249 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION route domain lt ip Enables a routing domain for address mask bits configuration See Section 40 9 5 on page 264 for more details ip address ip mask Sets the IP address and subnet mask of the out of band management port default gateway Sets the default gateway s IP ip address for the out of band management port name server ip Sets the IP address of a domain name server route ip mask Creates a static route next hop ip ip mask Sets the metric of a static route next hop ip or deactivates a static route metric lt metric gt name lt name gt inactive lacp Enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP system priority 1 655352 Sets the priority of an active port using LACP
199. igure 58 Policy Summary Table Index Active 1 Yes Name Classifier s Delete Test Example rH Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Chapter 19 Policy Rule GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 39 Policy Summary Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 19 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 18 4 on page 126 Chapter 19 Policy Rule 132 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 59 Policy Example lassifier s Metering VLAN ID fi Bandwidth 1000 Mbps EgressPort Port E uera 3 Parameters Outgoing packet format for Egress port Tag C Untag Priority o
200. ilure DLF on the switch egress set port Disables the egress port setting list flow control Disables flow control on the port s gvrp Disable GVRP on the port s igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering profile igmp group limit Disables IGMP group limitation igmp immediate Disables the IGMP immidiate leave leave function inactive Enables the port s on the Switch ingress check Disables ingress checking on the port s intrusion lock Disables intrusion lock on a port so that a port can be connected again after you disconnected the cable mirror Disables port mirroring on the port s multicast limit Disables multicast limit on the port s vlan trunking Disables VLAN trunking on the port s pvid lt 1 4094 gt The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports Sets a PVID in the range 1 to 4094 for the specified interface qos priority 0 7 Setsthe quality of service priority for an interface speed duplex auto 10 half 10 Sets the duplex mode half or full 100 half 100 full and speed 10 100 or full 1000 full gt 1000 Mbps of the connection on the interface Selecting auto auto negotiation makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support spq Sets the port s to use Strict Priority Queuing test Performs an interface loopback test 263 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 96 interface
201. in sactaseutnt eigde rama na iaai iniaa 315 TBI T TR aE 1 5 etunesp eed a UO dopa PE yeasts Ha dede a 315 Tane T OUDIO T gs cccccsstuiatenss sanianedawsintecesiats A 316 Tapio TIA SUBRE 2 rarae RA AEEA E 316 HU XH rcli Pom P 316 Table TIG SUDMEL A surrainn nn ia E AE iA ERE 317 Tabie TT Eight UDIO aa A 317 Table 118 Class C Subnet Planning ausecsiceterei a rer Id Re bo YARRER eren 317 Table 119 Class B Subnet Planning 2uraccussseseceh cose eot oet ritenere erra Errare Ere 318 List of Tables 28 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 29 List of Tables GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the GS 4012F 4024 Ethernet Switch This preface introduces you to the GS 4012F 4024 Ethernet Switch and discusses the conventions of this User s Guide It also provides information on other related documentation There are two GS 4012F models The GS 4012F DC model requires DC power supply input of 48 VDC or 60 VDC 1 2A Max The GS 4012F AC model requires 100 240VAC 1 5A power About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the installation and configuration of your GS 4012F 4024 for its various applications Related Documentation Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documen
202. in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 42 8 Show VLAN Setting Syntax show vlan This command shows the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged SVLAN Static VLAN table An example is shown next For the Adct1 section of the last column is a port set to normal x is a forbidden port and F is a fixed port For the TagCt1 section of the last column T is a tagged port U is an untagged port 295 Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 203 show vlan Command Example ras show vlan 802 10 VLAN Static idx Name rasi Entry VID Active 1 active 2 active AdCtl TagCtl REREFERREFRPFEEEFRFEFFRERFFERE UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU TITDLITTTITITTTTITITPEIBD Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 296 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 297 Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 43 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies 43 1 Problems Starting Up the Switch Table 100 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on turn on when you turn on the switch If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should contact your vendor 43 2 Problems Accessing the Switch Table 101 Troubles
203. ing WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 60 Queuing Method COLMENA m oma OO OO ooo owe LI OE Ooo E I EEO ooo ow KI EOE ESI EIE ome KOI EOE ESI E IE ome OO ee om FI EIEIO Eo oe om FI EI OO oo ow FEO EO EO EOE E om I EI EIEIO ROE oma LO OOO Ee owe FJ EJ EO RO EOE 135 Chapter 20 Queuing Method GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring Method Select SPQ Strict Priority Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strict Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q3 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Round Robi
204. ing client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the switch Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the switch s WS web server Chapter 33 Access Control 212 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the switch s WS web server Figure 131 HTTPS Implementation WS 443 80 HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 33 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the switch then in your browser enter https switch IP Address as the web site address where switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the switch you wish to access 33 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked 213 Chapter 33 Access Control GS 4012F
205. ings e oe Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet 4 This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional F Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level gt Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default 6 Click OK to close the window 303 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 209 Security Settings Java Scripting Settings 125 Scripting amp Active scripting 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt E Scripting of Java applets T T a Q Prompt Llenar Poeni AG b Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset cm 43 2 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK
206. ional 30 4 2 Configuring DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Relay link to display the screen as shown Figure 98 DHCP Relay OWS ore Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 booo Remote DHCP Server 2 booo Remote DHCP Server 3 booo Relay Agent Information I Option 82 Information C Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 DHCP Relay LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Chapter 30 DHCP 188 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 71 DHCP Relay continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again 30 4 3 DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the s
207. is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process 85 Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 13 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology continued VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Administrative Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the Forbidden specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable frame You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged type incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have thi
208. is already in the same IP interface as the switch you don t need to create an IP interface for it However if you want to have the Sales network on a different routing domain you need to create a new IP interface This allows the switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks Figure 23 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface LA d 1 Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 60 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 0 1 the default MGMT port IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 50 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and IP Setup in the navigation panel 4 Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen For the Sales network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask 5 In the VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this IP interface to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 6 Click Add IP Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management in band C Outof band Management IP Address IP Address 182 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Apply Cancel IP Interface IP Address 182 168 2
209. is check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name up to 12 printable ASCII characters for the VLAN group for identification purposes VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this VLAN group the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to add the settings as a new entry in the summary table below Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group 89 Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 15 VLAN Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 3 Configure VLAN Port Setti
210. is not available in User mode Syntax show logging This command displays the system logs The following figure shows an example Figure 162 show logging Command Example rast show logging O Thu Jan 1 00 00 11 1970 PP2b INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 7 Thu Jan 1 01 06 26 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf can t get spOSPFArea t 10 Thu Jan 1 01 06 38 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf can t get spOSPFArea t 13 Thu Jan 1 01 06 50 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf can t get spOSPFArea t 16 Thu Jan 1 01 07 05 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf can t get spOSPFArea t 20 Thu Jan 1 00 00 04 1970 PPOc WARN SNMP TRAP 3 link up 21 Thu Jan 1 00 00 06 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 1 warm start 22 Thu Jan 1 00 00 06 1970 PINI WARN SNMP TRAP 3 link up 22 Thu Jan 1 00 00 06 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 24 Thu Jan 1 00 00 07 1970 PP23 ERROR ospfReadConf can t get spOSPFArea t 25 Thu Jan 1 00 00 11 1970 PP2b INFO adjtime task pause 1 day 30 Thu Jan 1 00 00 04 1970 PPOc WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up 31 Thu Jan 1 00 00 06 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 1 warm start 32 Thu Jan 1 00 00 06 1970 PINI WAR SNMP TRAP 3 link up Clear Error Log y n Note If you clear a log by entering y at the Clear Error Log y n prompt you cannot view it again 41 2 5 show interface Syntax show interface port number This command displays statistics of a port The following example shows that port 2 is
211. ist in the network topology DVMRP prunes trim the multicast delivery tree s DVMRP grafts attach a branch back onto the multicast delivery tree 27 3 Configuring DVMRP Configure DVMRP on the switch when you wish it to act as a multicast router mrouter Click IP Application DVMRP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 85 DVMRP MU NN Active O Threshold 255 Index Network VID Active 1 10 10 10 1 24 2 O 2 192 168 1 1 24 1 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen 175 Chapter 27 DVMRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 63 DVMRP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on the switch You should do this if you want the switch to act as a multicast router Threshold Threshold is the maximum time to live TTL value TTL is used to limit the scope of multicasting You should reduce this value if you do not wish to flood Layer 3 devices many hops away with multicast traffic This applies only to multicast traffic this switch sends out Index Index is the DVMRP configuration for the IP routing domain defined under Network The maximum number of DVMRP configurations allowed is the maximum number of IP routing domains allowed on the switch See Section 7 7 on page 79 for more information on IP routing domains Network This is the IP routing domain IP address and subnet mask you set up in IP Setup
212. istribute route 164 Route cost 166 Router ID 164 Router types 160 Status 162 Stub area 160 166 Virtual link 161 168 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 34 160 OSPF vs RIP 160 Out of Profile Action 131 Out of profile traffic 130 P Password 55 227 PHB Per Hop Behavior 128 180 Physical queue 134 Ping 220 Policy Actions 130 Example 132 Metering 130 View summary 131 Policy Rules 128 POP3 126 Port authentication 116 IEEE802 1x 117 RADIUS server 118 Port Based VLAN Type 78 Port details 67 Port isolation 90 93 Port Mirroring 262 282 Port mirroring 33 108 Port redundancy 110 Port security 35 120 Limit MAC address learning 121 Port setup 81 Port speed duplex 82 Port status 66 Port VID Default for all ports 263 Port VLAN trunking 86 Port based VLAN 91 All connected 93 Port isolation 93 Setting Wizard 93 Power 74 Backup power supply connector 48 Voltage 74 Priority 78 Priority level 78 Priority queue assignment 78 Product specification 308 PVID 91 323 Index GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Q Quality of Service QoS 122 Queue priority 136 Queue weight 135 136 Queuing 33 134 Queuing algorithm 134 136 Queuing method 134 136 Calculate 136 R RADIUS 116 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service 116 RADIUS server 116 Advantages 116 Network example 116 Settings 118 Rear panel 47 Redistribute route 164 Related Documentation 30 Remote management
213. istribution for routes learn through the selected protocol Type Select 1 for routing protocols such as RIP whose external metrics are directly comparable to the internal OSPF cost When selecting a path the internal OSPF cost is added to the AB boundary router to the external metrics Select 2 for routing protocols whose external metrics are not comparable to the OSPF cost In this case the external cost of the AB boundary router is used in path decision to a destination Metric Value Enter a route cost between 0 and 16777214 Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the above fields again Chapter 25 OSPF 164 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 25 4 Configuring OSPF Areas To ensure that the switch receives only routing information from a trusted layer 3 devices activate authentication The OSPF supports three authentication methods e None no authentication is used Simple authenticate link state updates using an 8 printable ASCII character password e MD5 authenticate link state updates using a 16 printable ASCII character password To configure an area set the related fields in the OSPF Configuration screen Figure 79 OSPF Configuration Area Setup OSPF Configuration Interface Virtual Link Status Active O Router ID 0 0 0 0 Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP Iv 1B 15 Static Vv ly 15 Apply Cancel
214. it Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 95 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forward Setup GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Filtering This chapter discusses static MAC address filtering 10 1 Overview Filtering means sifting traffic going through the switch based on the source and or destination MAC addresses and VLAN group ID 10 2 Configure a Filtering Rule Click Advanced Application Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the summary table for the settings Figure 41 Filtering GD Filtering g Active DH Name Discard source Discard destination MAC e 1s kL hb VID Action Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address Action Delete Yes Example 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 2 Discard dest E Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 19 Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deac
215. it Delay This field displays the transmission delay in seconds State This field displays the state of the switch backup or DR designated router Priority This field displays the priority of the switch This number is used in the designated router election Designated This field displays the router ID of the designated router Router Backup This field displays the router ID of a backup designated router Designated Router Time Intervals This field displays the time intervals in seconds configured Configured Neighbor Count This field displays the number of neighbor routers Adjacent This field displays the number of neighbor router s that is adjacent to the switch Neighbor Count Neighbor Neighbor ID This field displays the router ID of the neighbor Pri This field displays the priority of the neighbor This number is used in the designated router election State This field displays the state of the neighbor backup or DR designated router Dead Time This field displays the dead time in seconds Address This field displays the IP address of a neighbor Interface This field displays the MAC address of a device Link State Database Link ID This field displays the ID of a router or subnet ADV Router This field displays the IP address of the layer 3 device that sends the LSAs Age This field displays the time in seconds since the last LSA was sent Seq This field displays the link sequence number of the LSA Che
216. ital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area 1s likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ZERE BERRA Tel CERUTRIS ie AS REER SETS EIERN T ASS eRe SHS Notice 1 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada 3 Interference Statements and Warnings GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Certifications 1 Go to www zyxel com 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page Registratio
217. itch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags 4 Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged frames Untagged Frames 1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN 2 The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1 3 The switch ignores the port from which the frame came because the switch does not send a frame to the port from which it came The switch also does not forward frames to forbidden ports 4 If after looking at the SVLAN the switch does not have any ports to which it will send the frame it won t check the port filter 42 5 5 Delete VLAN ID Syntax no vlan vlan id Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 294 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide where lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table Figure 202 no vlan Command Example ras config no vlan 2 42 6 Enable VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN Static VLAN table 42 7 Disable VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id inactive This command disables the specified VLAN ID
218. ity of the uplink gateway secondary virtual ip ip Sets the secondary VRRP virtual gateway IP address service control ftp lt socket number gt Allows FTP access on the specified service port http lt socket number gt lt timeout gt Allows HTTP access on the specified service port and defines the timeout period https lt socket Allows HTTPS access on the number gt specified service port icmp Allows ICMP management packets snmp Allows SNMP management ssh socket number Allows SSH access on the specified service port telnet socket number Allows Telnet access on the specified service port snmp server contact system contact location system location gt Sets the geographic location and the name of the person in charge of this switch get community property Sets the get community set community property Sets the set community trap community property Sets the trap community trap destination ip Sets the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to spanning tree Enables STP on the switch lt port list gt Enables STP on a specified port lt port list gt path Cost 05535 Sets the STP path cost for a specified port lt port list gt priority lt 0 255 gt Sets the priority for a specified port hello time lt 1 10 gt m
219. kets Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multicast VLANs IP Application Static Route This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually RIP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP Routing Information Protocol direction and versions OSPF This link takes you to screens where you can view the OSPF status and configure OSPF settings IGMP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IGMP settings Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 54 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION DVMRP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol settings IP Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to remove VLAN tags from IP multicast packets on an out going port DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping
220. ks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port Ifthe switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 145 MAC Table Flowchart Forward to all ports Filter this frame Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Forward to outgoing port Chapter 36 MAC Table 228 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 36 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 146 MAC Table ED MAC Table aD Sort by MAC VID Port Index MAC Address VID Port Type 1 00 85 a0 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 2 00 85 a0 01 01 04 1 8 dynamic 3 00 a0 c5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic 4 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static 5 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information
221. le esee 281 Figure 193 miror Command Example aiosuhre be adtebe Cx da Rope a S a 282 Figure 184 gvrp Command EXamplg irren prete rprr at kinaiinisan 283 Figure 185 ingress check Command Example eeesssseesee tena 283 Figure 186 frame type Command Example eooeceeeeeeee riesen eaaet trea 284 Figure 187 epa Command Examplb 15545 br Ert en HO et anaiai 284 Figure 199 wir Command EXAUDI 3 5 o nda sore HERR CO EY eer RERO PN QUEE EEE RED R AER RR INR R 285 Figure 189 egress sot Command Example 22 coccccccs canes cerne tt mane catt d ue uat 285 Figure 190 qos priority Command Example uu iseeen cenae t nna ana kochen tat 286 Figare 197 name Command Example 1255 rrr RpE E REEREEU TES e eER PIS REEF PUT EQ Ped IAS 286 Figure 192 speed duplex Command Example sss 286 Figure 193 Tagged VLAN Configuration and Activation Example 289 Figure 194 CPU VLAN Configuration and Activation Example 290 Figure 195 GARP STATUS Command Example eese 290 Figure 196 GARP Timer Command Example 21s e riter prato to EEe FII S atto So UE REE pis 291 Figure 197 GVRP Status Command Example 2 uices rien hepate 291 Figure 198 vlan1q port default vid Command Example cecceceeeeeeeeteees 292 Figure 199 frame type Command Example o ere cte patr npn DP PP RE REP n ERR EPIS 293 Figure 200 no gvrp Command Examp
222. le eeeeeeseeeeeee eene trennen 293 Figure 201 Modifying Static VLAN Example seme 294 Figure 202 no vlan Command Example 1 eiissnaa neret eter et uu tat In etui 295 Figure 203 show vlan Command Example eese eee nnne 296 Figure 204 Popp BIOCKOF esi telae p iva pivot ae bpU T s reb E ees ua utu eig 299 Figure 205 Intormot OUI uussesscceteadetut ka tascectoti saec isinin cator aa aeie 300 Figure 206 RYLODHOLCIDUOINES a aise tain ctnein ci pri DEI rennene a aE S boda duas REA FERE Lea ESEE 301 Fiore 207 Pop up Blocker SOUNDS 32 oiii on PI hae rbvvi Ur EE ERI ket D Qu tipo d RESP dd 302 Figure 209 Iiterel DDUDIS utes eden DAE Rr ii Or A o LR ER LAS b a D ERR 303 Figure 209 Security Settings Java Scripting eseeeeee 304 Figure 210 Security Settings JAVA iioauccccinme sect ressacce er eses a oct eussa sucer eoe ra s eate qnae pet ok da 305 List of Figures 24 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide zc Fabel itc Me 306 25 List of Figures GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Tables C ocREIcCuML LEUTE 44 Table 2 Front Panel LEDS TC 48 Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub inks Overview esce neeennn nnne 52 Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details ssessssssssss 53 Table 5 Navigation Panel LINKS 42 ri rete a serbe das EYE M pU te Ex E PR ERE Pega aga e EE RAE Teo ESRERRI
223. le 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A 198 Figure 113 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B 198 Figure 114 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch A ssssessssss 198 Figure 115 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B 198 Fig re 116 Maimenanoe csc siectesssnescreessssrsseerantsccturvaamseduirraniaiadataanneounreaindaduenseane 200 Figwe TIT Firmware Upgrade aupcisdarerdadek pir doe br rea A E Rb ko Xt Hi nua 200 Figure 118 Restore Configurallon iuicuutecpi m ne REESE Ee EH EX eh tE PE PER RR PREX RU Fe CHR EE KR HEU 201 Figure 119 Backup COnDfIQUEAQOT i2 cicer tei toe tre teda rece date ka eit d teet aa 201 Figure 120 Load Factory Default Conformation ssssssee 202 Figure 121 Load Factory Default Siart Siesienps re SR PEFINOHAF FE ERE FERE USE PPM QUE ERAI 202 Figure 122 Reboot System Confirmation essei rete rd erbe da RR prd tb Reda 202 Figura 123 Reboot System Start uus eese o dede rne nannan eno LEER E pA BER Rudd 203 Figure 124 Console Port PHOD iioc curie correcte eer eto korr qaor ku eL camere u creda 206 List of Figures 22 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 129 ACS SS LOU ostiis o p per OREL deco per Ue HAE Pbed A da uad 207 Figure 126 SNMP Management Model eeeeeeeeseeeeeiese eene tnna nette natat ha a 207 Figure 127 Access Control SNMP 12 5 ccciiusccse ciere tddo intct rrt ttd ddr ida 209 Figure 128 Access Control Logins usc o
224. learning Learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with Address these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16K 0 means this feature is disabled so the switch will learn MAC addresses up to the global limit of 16K Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 121 Chapter 17 Port Security GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the switch 18 1 Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A layer 2 classifier groups traffic according to the
225. les telnet access to the Switch snmp server trap destination Disables sending of SNMP ip traps to a station spanning tree Disables STP lt port list gt Disables STP on listed ports ssh key Disables the secure shell server lt rsal rsa dsa gt encryption key Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication known hosts Removes the specified remote lt host ip gt hosts from the list of all known hosts 253 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION known hosts Removes remote known hosts host ip with the specified public key 1024 ssh 1024 bit RSA1 RSA or DSA rsa ssh dsa storm control Disables broadcast storm control timesync Disables timeserver settings trunk lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Disables the specified trunk 6 gt group lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Removes ports from the 6 gt interface specified trunk group lt port list gt lt T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Disables LACP in the specified 6 gt lacp trunk group vlan lt vlan id gt Deletes the static VLAN entry vlaniq gvrp Disables GVRP on the switch port isolation Disables port isolation vlan stacking Disables VLAN stacking password Change the password for Enable mode Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 254 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summa
226. loginPrecedence lt LocalOnly Select which database the LocalRADIUS switch should use first to RADIUSOn1ly gt authenticate a user logins username lt name gt Configures up to four read only password lt pwd gt login accounts logout Exits from the CLI mac aging time lt 10 3000 gt Sets learned MAC aging time mac filter name lt name gt mac Configures a static MAC mac addr vlan address port filtering rule lt vlan id gt drop lt src dst both gt inactive Disables a static MAC address port filtering rule mac forward name name mac Configures a static MAC mac addr vlan address forwarding rule vlan id interface lt interface id gt inactive Disables a static MAC address forwarding rule mirror port Enables port mirroring port num Enables port mirroring on a specified port mode zynos Changes the CLI mode to the ZyNOS format Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 250 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION multi login Enables multi login mvr lt vlan id gt Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN Registration configuration mode Refer to Section 40 10 on page 266 for more information no bandwidth control Disable bandwidth control on the switch bcp transparency classifier lt name gt Disables the classifier Each classifier has
227. ly Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable IGMP on the switch Note You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same time Refer to the section on IGMP snooping Index This field displays an index number of an entry Chapter 26 IGMP 172 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 62 IGMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Network This field displays the IP domain configured on the switch Refer to Section 7 7 on page 79 for more information on configuring IP domains Version Select an IGMP version from the drop down list box Choices are IGMP v1 IGMP v2 and None Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring the fields again 173 Chapter 26 IGMP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 27 DVMRP This chapter introduces DVMRP and tells you how to configure it 27 1 Overview DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS This DVMRP implementation is based on draft ietf idmr dvmrp v3 10 DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol The DVMRP metric is a hop count of 32 IGMP is a protocol used for joining or leaving a m
228. mation which will use the specified metric information redistribute static metric type lt 1 2 gt metric Sets the switch to learn static routing information which will use the specified metric lt 0 65535 gt information rip Enables and enters the RIP configuration mode exit Leaves the RIP configuration mode vrrp network lt ip Adds aa new VRRP network nd address gt lt mask bits gt enters the VRRP configuration vr id lt 1 7 gt uplink mode gateway lt ip gt exit Exits from the VRRP command mode inactive Disables the VRRP settings interval lt 1 255 gt Sets the time interval in seconds between Hello message transmissions name lt name string gt Sets a descriptive name of the VRRP setting for identification purposes no inactive Activates this VRRP no preempt Disables VRRP preemption mode no primary virtual ip Resets the network to use the default primary virtual gateway interface IP address no secondary virtual ip Sets the network to use the default secondary virtual gateway 0 0 0 0 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 258 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION preempt Enables preemption mode primary virtual ip ip Sets the primary VRRP virtual gateway IP address priority 1 254 Sets the priro
229. mber of physical layer 3 devices An IP address is associated with the virtual router A layer 3 device having the same IP address is the preferred master router while the other Layer 3 devices are the backup routers The master router forwards traffic for the virtual router When the master router becomes unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and takes over The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches A and B implementing one virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink gateway G Host X is configured to use VR1 192 168 1 20 as the default gateway If switch A has a higher priority it is the master router Switch B having a lower priority is the backup router Figure 101 VRRP Example 1 192 168 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 If switch A the master router is unavailable switch B takes over Traffic 1s then processed by switch B Chapter 31 VRRP 190 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 31 2 Viewing VRRP Status Click IP Application VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as shown next Figure 102 VRRP Status OCD Index 1 Yes Network VRID 192 158 1 1 24 1 Active VR Status Uplink Status Master Alive Poll Interval s m Sep Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 VRRP Status LABEL
230. mes received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored Select Access Port to have the switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 8 on page 84 for more background information on VLAN ID 141 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 45 VLAN Stacking continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Select a number from the drop down list box to configure the priority level of the outer tag 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Note Configure the priority level of the inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 142 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 143 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking GS 4012F 4024
231. ming frames for VLANS that are not included in a port member set An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable ingress checking on the interface Figure 185 ingress check Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface ingress check 41 8 9 frame type Syntax frame type lt all tagged gt where lt all tagged gt Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable ingress checking on the ports Enable tagged frame types on the interface 283 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 8 10 41 8 11 Figure 186 frame type Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface ingress check vas config interface frame type tagged spq Syntax spq Sets the interface to use Strict Priority Queuing An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable VLAN Trunking on the ports Figure 187 spq Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface spq WIT Syntax wrr lt wtl gt lt wt2 gt lt wt8 gt where Enables WRR Weighted Round Robin queuing method on the switch wtl lt wt2 gt Sets the interface to
232. n Register your product online for free future product updates and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Safety Warnings For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel can service the device Please contact your vendor for further information Use ONLY the dedicated power supply for your device Connect the power cord or power adaptor to the right supply voltage 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT use the device if the power supply is damaged as it might cause electrocution Ifthe power supply is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power supply Contact your local vendor to order a new power supply Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord and do NOT locate the product where anyone can walk on the power cord f you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical gas or water pipes will be damaged Do NOT install nor use your device during a thunderstorm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lig
233. n Scheduling WRR services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Q0 Q7 Weight When you select WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Calculate Click Calculate to make sure the WFQ queuing weights total to 100 if not an error message is displayed Chapter 20 Queuing Method 136 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 137 Chapter 20 Queuing Method GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 21 VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 21 1 Introduction A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANS even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This
234. n this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Clear Counter Select a port from the Port drop down list box and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port 6 2 1 Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the switch 67 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 27 Status Port Details aine m Status Port Info Port NO 24 Link 100M F Copper Status FORWARDING LACP Disabled TxPkts 277 RxPkts 220 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 03 18 TX Packet TX Packets 277 Multicast 0 Broadcast 1 Pause 0 Tagged 0 RX Packet RX Packets 220 M
235. ncel Chapter 22 Multicast 150 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 49 Multicast Setting MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID Mode Specify the MVR mode on the switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the switch Source Port This field is applicable for Ethernet ports Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes VLAN This field displays the multicast
236. nds Max Age fzo Seconds Forwarding Delay fis Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 o 128 NN 2 r i28 RN 3 O 128 fa 4 r EE RN 5 r 128 fa 6 i28 ja 7 128 RN 8 h28 Moo 9 r ioo ja 10 h28 ja 11 r i28 RN 12 r i28 RN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen see Figure 42 on page 100 Active Select this check box to activate STP Clear this checkbox to disable STP 101 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 23 Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root Switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch
237. network destinations 25 1 3 Interfaces and Virtual Links An OSPF interface is a link between a layer 3 device and an OSPF network An interface has state information an IP address and subnet mask associated with it When you configure an OSPF interface you first set an interface to transmit OSPF traffic and add the interface to an area You can configure a virtual link to establish maintain connectivity between a non backbone area and the backbone The virtual ink must be configured on both layer 3 devices in the non backbone area and the backbone 25 1 4 Configuring OSPF To configure OSPF on the switch do the following tasks 1 Enable OSPF 2 Create OSPF areas 3 Create and associate interface s to an area 4 Create virtual links to maintain backbone connectivity 161 Chapter 25 OSPF GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 25 2 OSPF Status To view current OSPF status click IP Application OSPF in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 77 OSPF Status Pug NEED Configuration Interface IVLINK0 is down line protocol is down xs OSPF is enabled but not running on this interface swif2 is up line protocol is up Internet Address 192 168 1 10 24 Area 192 168 1 1 Router ID 192 168 1 10 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 15 Transmit Delay is 1 sec State Backup Priority l im P Neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 192 168 1 1 l Full DR 00 00 34 192 168 1 1 swi
238. ng table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number Table 36 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 125 Chapter 18 Classifier GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 36 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number continued ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 37 Common IP Ports PORT NUMBER PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 18 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an
239. ng table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 22 3 2 MVR Modes You can set your switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 22 3 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the switch t
240. ngs To configure the VLAN settings on a port click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 37 VLAN VLAN Port Setting ED VLAN Port Settna eg VLAN Status GVRP E Port isolation O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking 1 D E o far D 2 n mn fal m 3 m hf nmn Jal n 4 Dn 1 D Al X rn 5 Dr Bp A m 6 D B jal n 7 m bo o A rj 8 rH fh n jal m 3 p L 5 u s P 10 n a ar P T p m us P 12 r h n A m Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 VLAN VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch Port Isolation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port but not communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure Port This field displays the port number Ingress Check Select this check box to activate ingress filtering Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering Chapter 8 VLAN 90 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 16 VLAN VLAN Port Setting continued
241. nicast frame the egress port based on the destination MAC address must be a member of the VID also otherwise the frame is blocked A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on an individual VLAN and port basis remember that a port can belong to multiple VLANs If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame otherwise it is transmitted as an untagged frame 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 8 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 8 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
242. normal lt port list gt untagged lt port list gt no fixed lt port list gt no forbidden lt port list gt no untagged lt port list gt where lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID 1 4094 lt name str gt A name to identify the SVLAN entry lt port list gt This is the switch port list Enter fixed to register the lt port list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter normal to confirm registration of the lt port 1list gt to the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt 293 Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Enter forbidden to block a lt port list gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vlan id gt Enter no fixedorno forbidden to change port list to normal status Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames 42 5 4 1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example The following example configures ports to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000 Figure 201 Modifying Static VLAN Example ras config vlan 2000 ras config vlan fixed 1 5 ras config vlan untagged 1 5 42 5 4 2 Forwarding Process Example Tagged Frames 1 First the switch checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames 2 The switch then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table 3 The switch notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the sw
243. now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 6 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons 57 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 22 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 7 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 58 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 59 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 5 Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the example network Configure an IP interface Configure DHCP server settings Createa VLAN Set port VLAN ID Enable RIP 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interface On a layer 3 switch an IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port The default IP address of the switch is 192 168 1 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 In the example network since the RD network
244. nsmitted with this VLAN Group ID normal port list Specifies the port s to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP untagged port list Specifies the port s you don t want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID 40 10 mvr Commands The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode Table 99 Command Summary mvr Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION mvr 1 4094 Enters the MVR Multicast VLAN Registration configuration mode exit Exist from the MVR configuration mode group lt name str gt start address ip end address ip Sets the multicast group range for the MVR inactive Disables MVR settings mode dynamic compatible Sets the MVR mode dynamic or compatible name lt name str gt Sets the MVR name for identification purposes no group Disables all MVR group settings group lt name str gt Disables the specified MVR group setting inactive Enables MVR receiver port port list Disables the receiver port s An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 266 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 99 Command Summary mvr Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION source port lt port Disables the source port s An MVR list Source port can sen
245. nt at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 19 1 2 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 19 2 Configuring Policy Rules Note You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Chapter 18 on page
246. o leave the multicast group The switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a DSL port on the switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table 149 Chapter 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 67 MVR Multicast Television Example 22 4 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the switch Your switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 68 Multicast Setting MVR Aw END Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging 1 C o O 2 o D 3 C o D 4 o oO 5 o nm 5 o DO 7 e o rm 8 o m 9 o e o 10 C 2 m 11 C C c n 12 C C 2 m Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port Delete Delete Ca
247. od timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer the default is 10000 milliseconds This command sets the switch s GARP timer settings including the join leave and leave all timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds Figure 196 GARP Timer Command Example ras config garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000 42 4 3 GVRP Timer Syntax show vlanlq gvrp This command shows the switch s GVRP settings An example is shown next Figure 197 GVRP Status Command Example ras show vlanlq gvrp GVRP Support gvrpEnable YES GVRP Support 42 4 4 Enable GVRP Syntax vlanlq gvrp 291 Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the switch 42 4 5 Disable GVRP Syntax no vlanlq gvrp This command turns off GVRP so that the switch does not propagate VLAN information to other switches 42 5 Port VLAN Commands You must configure the switch port VLAN settings in config interface mode 42 5 1 Set Port VID Syntax
248. of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12bits 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames VLAN group ID or VID is a unique number than identifies a VLAN A port VID PVID is the VID associated to a physical port A PVID defines the VLAN group to which a port belongs Each port on the switch 1s capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed Chapter 8 VLAN 84 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The egress outgoing port s of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination MAC address and the VID of the frame For a u
249. of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 20 on page 98 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 102 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 103 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed from specific source s to specified destination s using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Introduction to Bandwidth Control Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port 12 1 1 CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwi
250. olve performance degradation when there 1s network congestion Two scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ and Weighted Round Robin WRR This allows the switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide IGMP IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a session layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP Snooping The switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch IP Multicast With IP multicast the switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Re
251. omain ospf authentication same aa Sets the same OSPF authentication settings in the routing domain as the associated area ospf cost lt 1 65535 gt Sets the OSPF cost in this routing domain ospf message digest key lt k gt Sets the OSPF authentication key in this routing domain Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 264 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 97 interface route domain Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION rip direction lt Outgoing In gt Sets the RIP direction in this routing domain vrrp authentication key lt k gt Sets the VRRP authentication key in the routing domain authentication key no ip dvmrp Disables DVMRP in this routing domain ip igmp Disables IP IGMP in this routing domain ip ospf Disables OSPF authentication key settings in this routing domain ip ospf authentication sama Sets the routing domain not to use the same OSPF authentication settings as the area ip ospf cost Disables the OSPF cost in the routing domain ip ospf message digest key Sets the routing domain not to use a security key in OSPF ip vrrp authentication key Resets the VRRP authentication settings 40 9 6 config vlan Commands The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode Table 98 Command Summary config vlan Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION vlan lt 1 4094
252. ommands available in the switch together with a brief description of each command Commands listed in the tables are in the same order as they are displayed in the CLI See the related section in the User s Guide for more background information 40 9 1 User Mode The following table describes the commands available for User mode Table 933 Command Summary User Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION enable Accesses Enable or privileged mode See Section 40 9 2 on page 243 exit Logs out from the CLI help Displays help information history Displays a list of previously command s that you have executed The switch stores up to 256 commands in history logout Exits from the CLI ping lt IP host name gt Sends a Ping request to an Ethernet device lt in band out of band vlan lt vlan id gt size lt 0 1472 gt t help Displays help information for this command show hardware monitor lt C F gt Displays current hardware monitor information with the specified temperature unit Celsius C or Fahrenheit F ip Displays IP related information system information Displays general system information ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest ip gt Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 242 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 93 Command Summary User Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION traceroute lt ip host name gt in b
253. one rule If you disable a classifier you cannot use policy rule related information lt name gt inactive Enables a classifier cluster Disables cluster management on the switch member mac address Removes the cluster member dhcp relay Disables DHCP relay information Disables the relay agent information option 82 option System name is not appended to option 82 information field dhcp server vlan id Disables DHCP server settings default gateway Disables DHCP server default gateway settings primary dns Disables DHCP primary DNS server settings secondary dns Disables DHCP server secondary DNS settings diffserv Disables the DiffServ settings https timeout Resets the session timeout to the default of 300 seconds igmp filtering Disables IGMP filtering on the switch profile lt name gt Disables the specified IGMP filtering profile profile lt name gt start address lt ip gt end address ip Clears the settings of the specified IGMP filtering profile igmp snooping Disables IGMP snooping ip Sets the management IP address to the default value 251 Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION route ip mask Removes a specified I
254. ongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 22 2 1 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications Multicast and the Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown 145 Chapter 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 64 Multicast Setting Port immed Leave r E EEE TE EE TE E E oe Seo Oo Oo boo NM QL Dieses NEN IGMP Snooping IGMP Filtering Unknown Multicast Frame Multicast Status IGMP Filtering Profile VR Active Active Flooding C Drop Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode NN Detaut Auto bo Default Auto r NN Defaut Auto fo Defaut Auto r fo Deteut z Auto fo Deteut Auto fo Deteut Auto pP Deteut Auto r fo Deteut Auto p Defaut z auto s D Deteut Auto 0 fo Default Auto gt g Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Select Active to enable IGMP snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Multicast Frame IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to limit the IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Unknown Specify the action to perform when the switch receives an unknown multicast
255. or identification purpose only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN identification Address number to which the MAC address belongs Action This field displays the filter action Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column 97 Chapter 10 Filtering GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Spanning Tree Protocol This chapter introduces the Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP 11 4 STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allow faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port state
256. ort bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and back pressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it Chapter 7 Basic Setting 82 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 12 Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1P Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 10 on page 78 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with
257. ot a transit area since there is only one connection to the stub area The following table describes the four classes of OSPF routers Table 54 OSPF Router Types TYPE DESCRIPTION Internal Router IR An Internal or intra area router is a router in an area Area Border Router ABR An Area Border Router connects two or more areas Backbone Router BR A backbone router has an interface to the backbone AS Boundary Router ASes An AS boundary router exchanges routing information with routers in other Chapter 25 OSPF 160 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following figure depicts an OSPF network example The backbone is area 0 with a backbone router The internal routers are in area 1 and 2 The area border routers connect area 1 and 2 to the backbone Figure 76 OSPF Network Example 25 1 2 How OSPF Works Layer 3 devices exchange routing information to build synchronized link state database within the same AS or area They do this by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor layer 3 devices exist and then they exchange database descriptions DDs to create the link state database The link state database in constantly updated through LSAs Link State Advertisements The link state database contains records of router IDs their associated links and path costs Each device can then use the link state database and Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least cost paths to
258. our network Restore switch configuration Use the same configuration file to set all switches of the same model in your network to the same settings Note You may also edit a configuration file using a text editor Make sure you use valid commands The switch rejects configuration files with invalid or incomplete commands 40 2 Accessing the CLI You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the CLI on the switch Note The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity If this happens to you simply log back in again Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 236 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 40 2 1 Access Priority You can only access the CLI with the administrator account the default username is admin and password is 1234 By default only one CLI management session is allowed via either the console port or Telnet Console port access has higher priority Use the configure multi login command in the configuration mode to allow multiple concurrent logins However no more than five concurrent login sessions are allowed 40 2 2 The Console Port Connect to the switch s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the following settings VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control 40 2 2 1 Initial Screen When you turn on your switch it performs several internal tests
259. port channel Commands continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION vlan stacking priority 0 72 Sets the priority of the specified port s in VLAN stacking tunnel role access Sets the VLAN stacking port roles of the specified port s SPVID lt 1 4094 gt Sets the service provider VID of the specified port s vlan trunking Enables VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch WII Sets the port s to use Weighted Round Robin queuing WRR wt8 wtl lt wt2 gt Sets the interface to use WRR queuing A weight value of one to eight is given to each variable from wt1 to wt8 40 9 5 interface route domain Commands The following table lists the interface route domain commands in configuration mode Use these commands to configure the IP routing domains Table 97 interface route domain Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION interface route domain lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt Enables a routing domain for configuration exit Exits from the interface routing domain command mode ip dvmrp Enables this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch igmp v1 v2 Enables IGMP in this routing domain ospf authentication key k Enables OSPF authentication in this routing d
260. ps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Note Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the switch Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the switch 3 Repeat steps and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the switch 4 You may now mount the switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack 41 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack D00 0 00O
261. pvid lt VID gt where VID Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094 This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port s The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5 Figure 198 vlan1q port default vid Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 5 ras config interface pvid 200 42 5 2 Set Acceptable Frame Type Syntax frame type all tagged where saliitagged gt Specifies all Ethernet frames tagged and untagged or only tagged Ethernet frames Chapter 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 292 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames Figure 199 frame type Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 5 ras config interface frame type tagged 42 5 3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port s Usethe no gvrp command to disable GVRP The following example turns off GVRP for ports 1 to 5 Figure 200 no gvrp Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 5 ras config interface no gvrp 42 5 4 Modify Static VLAN Use the following commands in the config vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table Syntax vlan vlan id fixed lt port list gt forbidden port list name lt name str gt
262. query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 2 2 IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups This allows you to have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service like a SIP server for example Within a profile configure an IGMP filter to specify the multicast IP address ranges Then assign the IGMP filter profile to the ports in the Multicast Setting screen that are allowed to use the service Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 65 Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile Ne nri qM Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Default rH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel 147 Chapte
263. r 22 Multicast GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes Note To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the same profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the settings to the switch Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click
264. r s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the switch 1 1 Introduction Your switch is a stand alone layer 3 Gigabit Ethernet switch By integrating router functions the switch performs wire speed layer 3 routing in addition to layer 2 switching The GS 4024 comes with 24 Gigabit Ethernet ports and four Gigabit mini GBIC ports The GS 4012F comes with with 12 min GBIC slots and four Gigabit mini GBIC ports There are two GS 4012F models The GS 4012F DC model requires DC power supply input of 48 VDC or 60 VDC 1 2A Max The GS 4012F AC model requires 100 240VA C 1 5A power With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the switch is easy In addition the switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management 1 2 Software Features This section describes the general software features of the switch IP Routing Domain An IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port Configure an IP routing domain to allow the switch to route traffic between different networks DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the switch as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the switch provides the TCP IP configuration
265. rbidden M Tx Tagging C Fixed C Fixe M TxTagging Tx Tagging M TxTagging d C Forbidden devices such as computers and 12 Normal C Fixed M Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete 4 Yes 1 O Delete Cancel hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings 5 1 4 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 10 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID I N W E Internet N 5 VLAN 1 Ja viaN2 m 63 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 1 Click Advanced E VLAN Port Setting g VLAN Status Applications and VLAN URP z in the navigation panel Portisolation r Then click the VLAN Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Port Setting link a z rm m n f oO g 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field E z m for port 10 and click 4 r f A z ri Apply to save the 5 Dollh T ao z 6 B 1 r All m r settings 5 r r a 8 r J n Aly D 9 n 1 BH All m 11 O 1 Al Rs r 12 r 1 B All e r Apply Cancel 5 1 5 Enabling R
266. rd to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on this interface Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password key up to eight printable ASCII character long in this field Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table 31 3 2 VRRP Parameters This section describes the VRRP parameters 31 3 2 1 Advertisement Interval The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still up and running The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement interval By default a Hello message is sent out every second If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval expires it is assumed that the master router is down Then the backup router with the highest priority becomes the master router Note All routers participating in the virtual router must use the same advertisement interval 31 3 2 2 Priority Configure the priority level 1 to 254 to set which backup router to take over in case the master router goes down The backup router with the highest priority will take over The priority of the VRRP router that owns the IP address es associated with the virtual router is 255 31 3 2 3 Preempt Mode If the master router is unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router However when another backup router with a higher
267. rding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that second is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree P agy Changed This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured imes Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 100 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 22 Spanning Tree Protocol Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt STP statistic polling 11 2 1 Configure STP To configure STP click the Configuration link in the Spanning Tree Protocol screen as shown next Figure 43 Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Spanning Tree Protocol NN Status Active m Bridge Priority 32768 gt Hello Time e Seco
268. rdless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status Click Advanced Application VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 35 VLAN VLAN Status OREINEN VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number Of VLAN 1 Port Number 6 8 10 12 Elapsed Time Status 5 7 Er Lid U U U U U U U U Index VID c c pm C Cut x 2 54 57 Static PollInterval s 40 Set Interval Stop Change Pages Previous Page Next Page The following table describes the labels in this screen 87 Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 14 VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of This is the number of VLANs configured on the switch VLAN Index This is the VLAN index number VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the VLAN Setup Screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch dynamically using GVRP or statically that is added as a permanent entry Poll Interval s The text bo
269. re browse to the location ofthe binary BIN file and click Apply button File Path Browse Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Upgrade Chapter 32 Maintenance 200 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number 32 3 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 118 Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration from a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen below from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 32 4 Backing Up a Configuration File Backing up your switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later
270. re Overview GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 3 2 2 External Backup Power Supply Connector The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the switch in the event of a power failure Once the switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed 3 3 Front Panel LEDs The LEDs are located on the front panel The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel Table2 Front Panel LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally Gigabit Ethernet Ports 1000 Green Blinking The port is sending receiving data On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up when the 100 LED is on Off No Ethernet device is connected to this
271. ress fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 38 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s Chapter 38 ARP Table 232 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 149 ARP Table ED ARP Table g Index IP Address 1 172 21 0 2 2 172 21 3 16 3 172 21 3 19 4 172 21 3 40 5 172 21 3 66 6 172 21 3 90 7 172 21 3 91 8 172 21 3 95 g 172 21 3 120 10 172 21 3 138 11 172 21 4 99 12 172 21 10 11 13 172 21 100 153 14 172 21 207 247 15 182 168 1 1 16 192 158 1 5 17 192 168 1 10 18 192 168 1 100 MAC Address 00 05 50 04 30 f1 00 05 1c 15 08 71 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed 00 0c 76 07 41 0d 00 50 8d 47 73 4f 00 05 5df4 49 20 00 50 ba ad 55 7c 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 00 1 0 b5 ae 62 32 00 a0 5 b2 62 26 00 0c 76 09 cf 88 08 00 20 ad 16 88 00 90 27 be a2 8c 00 0 76 09 17 1a 00 a0 5 3f 91 56 00 85
272. rmation Bridge Control Select Active to allow the switch to handle bridging control protocols STP for Protocol example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen Transparency MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has
273. rnet Options Internet Options p General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing C Block pop up 3 Click Apply to save this setting 43 2 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 300 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 206 Internet Options Internet Options pann General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Intemet gt zone P Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LA information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally
274. rnet type number in hexadecimal value Refer to Table 36 on page 125 for information Select All if you don t know Source MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a source select MAC and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Select the port to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports All Ports Destination MAC Address Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Protocol Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value Refer to Table 37 on page 126 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections Source IP Address Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Prefix Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Socket Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field Number before you configur
275. rom one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis An example is shown next Enable port mirroring Enable the monitor port three Enable ports one four five and six for configuration Enable port mirroring on the ports Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic Traffic is copied from ports one four five and six to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Figure 183 mirror Command Example vas config mirror port vas config mirror port 3 ras config interface port channel 1 4 6 ras config interface mirror ras config interface mirror dir egress 41 8 7 gvrp Syntax gvrp GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch An example is shown next Chapter 41 Command Examples 282 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Enable the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the switch Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Enable GVRP on the interface Figure 184 gvrp Command Example ras config vlanlq gvrp ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface gvrp 41 8 8 ingress check Syntax ingress check Enables the device to discard inco
276. rrent configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 1 on page 45 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type at1c after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the switch Figure 21 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 0 11 26 2004 15 56 35 RAM Size 64 Mbytes FLASH Intel 32M ZyNOS Version V3 60 LL 0 b2 01 18 2005 00 39 28 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode GS 4012F gt atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCOCCCCGCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing OK GS 4012F atgo The switch is
277. rt up from a server You can configure the switch as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you disable the DHCP service you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 30 1 1 DHCP modes The switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent e f you configure the switch as a DHCP server it will maintain the pool of addresses and distribute them to your LAN computers If there is an Ethernet device that performs the DHCP server function for your network then you can configure the switch as a DHCP relay agent When the switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the Ethernet device the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 30 2 DHCP Server Status Click IP Application DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Server Status screen displays Chapter 30 DHCP 184 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 94 DHCP DHCP Server Status uper Server Relay Index VID Server Status IP Pool Size 1 2 10 10 10 100 100 Polling Interval s ao Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 DHCP DHCP Server Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to whi
278. ry Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION policy name classifier lt classifier list gt lt vlan lt vlan id gt egress port port num priority lt 0 7 gt dscp lt 0 63 gt tos 0 7 bandwidth lt bandwidth gt outgoing packet format lt tagged untagged gt out of profile dscp lt 0 63 gt forward action lt drop forward gt queue action lt prio set prio queue prio replace tos gt diffserv action diff set tos diff replace priority diff set dscp gt outgoing mirror outgoing eport outgoing non unicast eport outgoing set vlan metering out of profile action lt change dscp drop forward gt inactive gt Configures a policy A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network port access authenticator Enables 802 1x authentication on the switch lt port list gt Enables 802 1x authentication on the specified port s reauthenticate Sets a subscriber to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to a specified port reauth period lt reauth period gt Specifies how often a client has to re enter the username and password to stay connected to the specified port s port security Enables port security on the device lt port list
279. s DHCP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DHCP settings VRRP This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for your network Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port s Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Routing Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the routing table 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management Access Control and then Logins to display the next screen 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator GS 4012F 4
280. s are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value MAC address Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 20 STP Path Costs LINK SPEED Pee eae SER Cees ore la Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 98 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designa
281. s are added and deleted using GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP where GARP is the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 42 3 Configuring Tagged VLAN The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN 1 Use the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the switch Use the vlan vlan id command to configure or create a VLAN on the switch The switch automatically enters the config vlan mode Use the inactive command to deactivate the VLAN s Use the interface port channel lt port list gt command to enter the config interface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port then use the pvid lt vlan id gt command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port list to that specific port in the PVID table Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN Example Figure 193 Tagged VLAN Configuration and Activation Example ras config vlan 2000 ras config vlan name upl ras config vlan fixed 10 12 ras config vlan f no untagged 10 12 ras config vlan exit ras config interface port channel 10 12 ras config interface pvid 2000 ras config interface exit 2 Configure your management VLAN Use the vlan vlan id command to create a VLAN VID 3 in this example for managing the switch and the switch will activate the new management VLAN Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN Example
282. s in these slots for fiber optical connections to backbone Ethernet switches MGMT Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the switch CONSOLE Only connect this port if you want to configure the switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 44 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the switch Connect the female end to a serial port COMI COM or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports The GS 4024 has 24 100 1000Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Gigabit Ethernet ports In 10 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet the speed can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex for 100 Mbps or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto
283. s port as a member 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 33 Port VLAN Trunking N 3 a B Sn v1 v2 NEG 8 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen Chapter 8 VLAN 86 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 34 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type OEE aD 80210 VLAN Type C Port Based IGMP Snooping Active Anina Tima 3nn E aa 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sentto a VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group rega
284. s switches routers computers print servers etc Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 36 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 4 2 Bridging Example In this example application the switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the switch Moreover the switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application de Internet gt gm mamma s mm momo m Sales ras o eee eee eee eee mmm eee IE 1 4 3 High Performance Switching Example The switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks 37 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being abl
285. s the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the switch in the IP domain Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask of the switch in the IP domain VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the switch Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out from the switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 7 8 Port Setup Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration Screen 81 Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 32 Port Setup ONInkEn NE Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority BPDU Control 1 pn 1000M jato e rj joy Peer gt 2 MW pon 1000M au H D 0v Peer gt 3 m poo 1000M ato rz m joz Peer gt 4 m ponts 1000M jato sz r Oy Pee 5 WM pomo 1000M jato o A r joz Peer gt 6 Wf pone 1000M autos o 0T Peer gt 7 M pon 1000M auto sss n Joy Pee 8 Ww poos 1000M jato gt rz r Oy Peer gt 9 m poog tono0no00m Auto O joz Peer gt 10 WM pomo tonooo00m Auto gt O 0r Peer e t1 M pot 101000000M Ato 7 r joz Peer gt 12 M poti2 tonooo00m ato gt n r Peer e Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this scr
286. screen Figure 19 Web Configurator Home Screen Status Status E Logout B Help d Application System Up Time 2 14 41 IP Application Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Management 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled D D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 139 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 350 408 0 0 0 00 21430 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Poll Interval s ao Set Interval Stop Port ALL gt Clear Counter 51 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Management System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup ication VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN
287. sh known hosts 172 165 1 9 ssh rsa 41 8 interface Commands These are some commonly used commands that belong to the interface group of commands Chapter 41 Command Examples 278 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 41 8 1 interface port channel Syntax interface port channel lt port list gt Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Begin configuring for those ports Figure 178 interface Command Example rast config ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface 41 8 2 interface route domain Syntax interface route domain lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt where lt ip address gt This is the IP address of the switch in the routing domain Specify the IP address is dotted decimal notation For example 192 168 1 1 mask bits The number of bits in the subnet mask Enter the subnet mask number preceded with a To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary and add all of the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1 s in binary There are three 255 s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 Use this command to enable create the specified rou
288. ssible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 109 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 255 255 255 0 124 0000 0000 255 255 255 128 125 1000 0000 255 255 255 192 126 1100 0000 255 255 255 224 127 1110 0000 255 255 255 240 128 1111 0000 255 255 255 248 129 1111 1000 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask 1s being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 110 Two Subnets Example NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C You want to have two separate networks Divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 IP Subnetting 314 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Note In the following charts shaded bol
289. ssifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning IGMP snooping GARP and priority queues 53 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual switch ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do no
290. sssssseeeee 298 43 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 299 43 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeees 299 Aa 14 OME susien unan ANAE SEa a E OE TE ERER AUREUM eben EHE 302 CORN NCD C ELI o e sonini idiak ei ia 304 23 3 Problems with the Password 12stescece pret re ood d etr Eod toga ERO rr niai 306 Appendix A Product SpeciticatlOfig sie esas saraendka pans Ina ra Da PR do ed PER ax FE RECO nda FERE FERREXEURRS FERE ERROR 308 Appendix B uk i pier aa a 312 VR mncimieons 320 Table of Contents 18 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 19 Table of Contents GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Backbone ADU 5a isso o oon e ir ol p tex Ede a Fons 37 Figure 2 Bridging Applicaton gem rc 37 Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application 38 Figure 4 Tag based VLAN Application eeeeeeeeeeeeseeenen enne 39 Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example eee nennen 39 Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feel 2c eredi ra cod aii ani 40 Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets ccccsccccceseeccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeccaneeenees 41 Figure 9 Mounting the Switch on a Rack osse enn R CHE eun RR EP HE d MERE ei 42 Figure O Fron Panek GO US ossi eser DO RHEINE EPRRAXT REP y LASER GR A 44 Figure TO Front Panel GO OTZE usse
291. ster Management GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 144 Clustering Management Configuration Clustering Management Configuration d Status Clustering Manager Active Iv Name Master VID 1 Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 80 c5 00 00 01 ES 4024A ES 4024A List Password Add Cancel Refresh Index MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Clustering Management Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 20 printable characters no spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clu
292. stering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save these changes to the switch Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Chapter 35 Cluster Management 226 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 88 Clustering Management Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displaved as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save this part of the screen to the switch
293. sword PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Cannot access the The password field is case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct switch password using the proper casing The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 306 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 307 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide APPENDIX A Product Specifications The following table lists the product specifications Table 103 General Product Specifications Interface GS 4012F 12 mini GBIC SFP slots GS 4024 24 10 100 1000 Base Tx ports 4 Gigabit mini GBIC ports One local management Ethernet port Auto negotiation Auto MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x RJ 45 Ethernet cable connector Rate limiting at 64Kbps steps Layer 2 Features Bridging 16K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering port lock Broadcast storm control Limited maximum number of MAC addresses per port Switching Switching fabric 48Gbps GS 4024
294. t age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the STP RSTP to prevent Protocol network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed Control from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm Control This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS Remote Authentication Authentication Dial In User Service a protocol for user authentication that allows you to use an external server to validate an unlimited number of users Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to group packets based on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the switch to perform special treatment on the grouped pac
295. t switch to avoid causing network topology loops Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 110 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 15 1 2 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 27 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 28 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 2 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default Figure 47 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Index Polling Interval s Aggregator ID 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 40 Set Interval Stop Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Enabled Ports Synchronized
296. table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 Routing Table Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number Destination This field displays the destination IP routing domain Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Metric This field displays the cost of the route Type This field displays the method used to learn the route Chapter 39 Routing Table 234 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 235 Chapter 39 Routing Table GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 40 Introducing the Commands This chapter introduces the commands and gives a summary of commands available 40 1 Overview In addition to the web configurator you can use line commands to configure the switch Use line commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting If you have problems with your switch customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting Note See the web configurator parts of this User s Guide for background information on features configurable by the web configurator 40 1 1 Switch Configuration File When you configure the switch using either the CLI Command Line Interface or web configurator the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the switch You can perform the following with a configuration file Back up switch configuration once the switch is set up to work in y
297. tation Syntax Conventions Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example click the Apple icon Control Panels and then Modem means first click the Apple icon then point your mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem For brevity s sake we will use e g as a shorthand for for instance and 1 e for that is or in other words throughout this manual The GS 4012F 4024 Ethernet Switch may be referred to as the switch in this User s Guide Preface 30 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Graphics Icons Key GS 4012F 4024 NCE Nanc Computer Server f ll Computer m NS A Gateway Central Office ISP EN p gr c Internet fik s hia Hub Switch d User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you 31 Preface GS 4012F 4024 Use
298. tatu END Index Active Network VRID VR Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 2 Backup 2 Yes 192 158 1 1 24 1 Master Uplink Status Configuration Alive Alive Figure 115 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B Aug NEN Index Active Network VRID VR Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 2 Master 2 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Uplink Status Configuration Alive Alive Chapter 31 VRRP 198 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 199 Chapter 31 VRRP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 32 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 32 1 The Maintenance Screen Click Management Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 116 Maintenance Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Reboot System Click Here 32 2 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 117 Firmware Upgrade ED Firmware Upgrade nd Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmwa
299. tches at longer distances than the Ethernet port 35 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Gigabit Ethernet Ports The ports allow the switch to connect to another WAN switch or daisy chain to other switches Management Port Connect a computer to this port for management purposes You cannot access the network through this port Console Port Use the console port for local management of the switch Backup Power Supply Port Connect a backup power supply device to this port to ensure uninterrupted network connection in the event of a power failure Fans The fans cool the switch sufficiently to allow reliable operation of the switch in even poorly ventilated rooms or basements Power The GS 4012F AC model and GS 4024 require 100 240VAC 1 5A power The GS 4012F DC model requires DC power supply input of 48 VDC or 60 VDC 1 2A Max 1 4 Applications This section shows a few examples of using the switch in various network environments 1 4 4 Backbone Application In this application the switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers directly to the switch s port or connect other switches to the switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such a
300. ted ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUS periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 21 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 2 STP Status Click Advance
301. ters It allows a switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch Maintenance and Management Features Access Control You can specify the service s and computer IP address es to control access to the switch for management Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Configuration and Firmware Maintenance You can backup or restore the switch configuration or upgrade the firmware on the switch 1 3 Hardware Features This section describes the ports on the switch Mini GBIC Slots Install SPF transceivers in these slots to connect to other Ethernet swi
302. that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects 207 Chapter 33 Access Control GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 78 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 33 3 1 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC
303. the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 22 3 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across a service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscriber to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR However MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information 1s hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the switch and S Chapter 22 Multicast 148 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 66 MVR Network Example 22 3 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the switch maintains a forwardi
304. the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Select Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU to the egress port to send the broadcast multicast DLF marked to drop or CPU frames to the egress port Select Set the packet s VLANID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLANID field Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile Action Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP Value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of Profile DSCP field above Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 19 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field F
305. the switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 93 Chapter 8 VLAN GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Overview A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the switch See Chapter 17 on page 120 for more information on port security 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding Click Advanced Applications Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the summary
306. thenticate Disables the re authentication mechanism on the listed port s port security Disables port security on the device Chapter 40 Introducing the Commands 252 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode continued COMMAND DESCRIPTION lt port list gt Disables port security on the specified ports lt port list gt learn Enables MAC address learning inactive on the specified ports radius server Disables the use of authentication from the RADIUS server remote management lt index gt Clears a secure client set entry from the list of secure clients lt index gt service Disables a secure client set telnet ftp entry number from using the http icmp snmp _ Selected remote management ssh https gt service router dvmrp Disables DVMRP on the switch igmp Disables IGMP on the switch ospf Disables OSPF on the switch rip Disable RIP on the switch vrrp network ip Deletes VRRP settings address gt lt mask bits vr id 1 7 service control ftp Disables FTP access to the Switch http Disables web browser control to the switch https Disables secure web browser access to the switch icmp Disables ICMP access to the Switch such as pinging and tracerouting snmp Disables SNMP management ssh Disables SSH Secure Shell Server access to the switch telnet Disab
307. this screen afresh Chapter 33 Access Control 210 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 33 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 129 SSH Communication Example SSH Server RAJZ SS SSH Client 33 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 130 How SSH Works Internet No 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server 211 Chapter 33 Access Control GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification 1s verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authen
308. tication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 33 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 33 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the switch over SSH 33 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the switch is used so that you may securely access the switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticat
309. ting domain for configuration An example is shown next Enter the configuration mode Enable default routing domain the 192 168 1 1 subnet for configuration Begin configuring for this domain 279 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 179 interface Command Example rast config ras config interface route domain 192 168 1 1 24 cmd interface route domain 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 ras config if 41 8 3 bpdu control Syntax bpdu control peer tunnel discard network where peer tunnel discard network Type peer to process any BPDUS received on these ports Type tunnel to forward BPDUs received on these ports Type discard to drop any BPDUs received on these ports Type network to process and forward BPDUs with a VLAN tag and to process untagged BPDUs An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the BPDU control to tunnel to forward BPDUs received on ports one three four and five Figure 180 interface bpdu control Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface bpdu control tunnel ras config interface 41 8 4 broadcast limit Syntax broadcast limit broadcast limit pkt s Chapter 41 Command Examples 280 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide where Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch lt pkt s gt Sets how many bro
310. tivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification purpose only Chapter 10 Filtering 96 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 19 Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC field The switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save the new rule to the switch It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is f
311. to close the window Chapter 43 Troubleshooting 304 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 210 Security Settings Java Security Settings d 3 xl Settings Q Disable 9 Enable es Font download Q Disable 9 Enable p Q Prompt 3 Microsoft vM Java permissions Q Custom oF 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium 7 Reset cm 43 2 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window 305 Chapter 43 Troubleshooting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 211 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections Java Sun Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart B Microsoft VM P a console enabled requires restart ESen enabled E ompiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing of b Restore Defaults 43 3 Problems with the Password Table 102 Troubleshooting the Pas
312. took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp CORPORATE www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II HEADQUARTERS Science Park WORLDWIDE sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o CZECH REPUBLIC info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXEL Communications A S DENMARK Columbusvej sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark support zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy FINLAND Malminkaari 10 sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland info zyxel fr 33 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers FRANCE 33 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH GERMANY Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany support zyxel hu 36 1 3361649 www zyxel hu ZyXEL Hungary HUNGARY 48 Zoldlomb Str info zyxel hu 36 1 3259100 H 1025 Budapest Hungary http zyxel kz support 7 3272 590 698 www zyxel kz ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk ave Office 414 KAZAKHSTAN sales
313. tor c f This command displays the current hardware status such as temperature and voltage levels The following figure shows an example using degree Celsius as the temperature unit Figure 160 show hardware monitor Command Example ras show hardware monitor c Temperature Unit c Temperature Current MAX MIN Threshold Status MAC 3350 34 0 32 0 65 0 ormal CPU 32 0 32 0 31 0 65 0 ormal PHY 33 40 2155 95 5 65 0 ormal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 5958 6009 5908 4500 Normal FAN2 6061 6114 6009 4500 Normal FAN3 6222 6222 6114 4500 ormal FAN4 6061 6114 6009 4500 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 245 25 16 2 576 2 576 5 ormal I 25 1 219 1 216 1 216 10 ormal 3 3 3 360 3 360 3 344 5 ormal 12 12 220 12 281 12 220 10 ormal 5 5 080 5 080 5 080 5 Normal 153 1 328 1 328 1 328 5 ormal 1 25 1 248 1 248 1 248 5 Normal ras gt 41 2 3 show ip Syntax show ip This command displays the IP related information such as IP address and subnet mask on all switch interfaces The following figure shows the default interface settings 269 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 161 show ip Command Example ras show ip Management IP Address IP 192 168 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 0 IP Interface IP 192 168 1 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 VID 1 ras 41 2 4 show logging Note This command
314. trol GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 34 Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 34 1 Diagnostic Click Management Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs reset the system or ping IP addresses Figure 139 Diagnostic L_ Diagnostic _ Resolving 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 10 Reply from 192 168 1 10 Reply from 192 168 1 10 Reply from 192 168 1 10 Ping Host Successful System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Pot Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test From the Port drop down list box select a port number and click Port Test to perform internal loopback test Chapter 34 Diagnostic 220 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 221 Chapter 34 Diagnostic GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 35 Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 35 1 Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager Th
315. twork Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 76 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNAL FILE TYPE NAME NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filename on the switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware Ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the switch 32 7 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer 203 Chapter 32 Maintenance GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Note Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 32 7 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and
316. ulticast 0 Broadcast 3 Pause 0 Control 0 TX Collision Single 0 Multiple 0 Excessive 0 Late 0 Error Packet RX CRC 0 Length 0 Runt 0 Distribution 64 221 65 to 127 13 128 to 255 5 256 to 511 74 51210 1023 22 1024 to 1518 162 Giant 0 Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber Status This field shows the training state of the ports The states are FORWARDING forwarding which means the link is functioning normally or STOP the port is stopped to break a loop or duplicate path LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 68 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 7 Status Port Details continued
317. ulticast group You must have IGMP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in Figure 86 on page 176 27 2 How DVMRP Works DVMRP uses the Reverse Path Multicasting RPM algorithm to generate an IP Multicast delivery tree Multicast packets are forwarded along these multicast tree branches DVMRP dynamically learns host membership information using Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP The trees are updated dynamically to track the membership of individual groups 1 Initially an advertisement multicast packet is broadcast B in the following figure 2 DVMRP enabled Layer 3 devices that do not have any hosts in their networks that belong to this multicast group send back a prune message P 3 If hosts later join the multicast group a graft message G to undo the prune is sent to the parent 4 The final multicast M after pruning and grafting is shown in the next figure Chapter 27 DVMRP 174 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 84 How DVMRP Works ee 27 2 1 DVMRP Terminology DVMRP probes are used to discover other DVMRP Neighbors on a network DVMRP reports are used to exchange DVMRP source routing information These packets are used to build the DVMRP multicast routing table that is used to build source trees and also perform Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks on incoming multicast packets RPF checks prevent duplicate packets being filtered when loops ex
318. unctioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed Poll Interval s The text box displays
319. up and the related information Chapter 41 Command Examples 270 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 163 show interface Command Example Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collison Error Packet Distribution rasi ras show interface 2 Port NO Link Statuss LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time Tx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Tagged Rx Packets ulticast Broadcast Pause Control Single ultiple Excessive Late RX CRC Length Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant 0 0 0 0 O OooO0oo0o0o0c 2 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 22778 22043 20 4 29 36 27778 2542 22043 22355 2463 2435 2593 154 821 41 2 6 show mac address table Syntax show mac address table all lt sort gt static gt Where sort Specifies the sorting criteria MAC VID or port This command displays the MAC address es stored in the switch The following example shows the static MAC address table 271 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 164 show mac address table Command Example ras show mac address table static Vid Mac Port Status 1 01 a0 c5 aa aa aa T Permanent 2 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 1 Permanent 1 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 CPU Permanent 2 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 CPU Permanent ras 41 3 ping Syntax ping ip lt in band out of band vlan vl
320. user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen The RADIUS is an external server Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first Select Local Only to have the switch just check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen Select Local then RADIUS to have the switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen If the user name is not found the Switch then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server You need to configure Port Authentication Radius first Select RADIUS Only to have the switch just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a login username and password 75 Chapter 7 Basic Setting GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 9 General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that a timeserver sends when you turn on the switch Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of secon
321. west Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 115 Subnet 3 LAST OCTET BIT NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 IP Subnetting 316 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Example Eight Subnets Table 116 Subnet 4 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create 8 subnets 001 010 011 100 101 110 The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 117 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS posae 1 0 1 30 31 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 RE F m 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 118 Class C Subnet Planning
322. witch is used to relay DHCP requests for the RD and Sales network There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both networks Figure 99 DHCP Relay Network Example m g b bo DHCP Server 192 168 1 100 Q Y Lo NO inte N 5 aal Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 100 DHCP Relay Configuration Example DHCP Relay Status Active Iv Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information M Option 82 Information rm Gs 4012F Apply Cancel 189 Chapter 30 DHCP GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 31 VRRP This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP on the switch 31 1 Overview Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway this switch The default gateway can become a single point of failure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available In VRRP a virtual router VR represents a nu
323. x displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt polling statistics Change Pages Click Previous Page or Next Page to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Configure a Static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Chapter 8 VLAN 88 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Figure 36 VLAN Static VLAN VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE O Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging 1 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 2 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 3 Norma C Fixed Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 5 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Taaging B Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTaaging 7 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTaaging 8 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging g Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 10 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 11 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 12 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete 1 Yes 1 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 15 VLAN Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select th
324. xample ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface ft qos priority 4 name Syntax name lt port name string gt where lt port name string gt Sets a name for your port interface s An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration e Set a name for the ports Figure 191 name Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface name Test speed duplex Syntax speed duplex lt auto 10 half 10 full 100 hal 100 full 1000 full gt where auto l0 half 10 Sets the duplex mode half or full and speed 10 100 or 1000 Mbps full 100 half 100 of the connection on the port Selecting auto auto negotiation pele ee eas makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support An example is shown next Enable ports one three four and five for configuration Set the speed to 10 Mbps in half duplex mode Figure 192 speed duplex Command Example ras config interface port channel 1 3 5 ras config interface speed duplex 10 half Chapter 41 Command Examples 286 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 287 Chapter 41 Command Examples GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 42 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands 42 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Overv
325. xample 294 Summary 242 Syntax conventions 238 Command Line Interface Accessing 236 Introduction 236 Configuration file 57 Backup 201 Restore 57 201 Index 320 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Configure QoS 122 Console port 36 Settings 45 Copyright 2 CPU management port 91 CRC Cyclic Redundant Check 69 Current date 76 Current time 76 Customer Support 6 D Database Description DD 161 Default gateway 186 DHCP 32 184 Client IP pool 186 Modes 184 Relay agent 184 Server 184 Setup 185 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 32 184 Diagnostic 220 Ethernet port test 220 Ping 220 System log 220 Differentiated Service DiffServ 180 DiffServ 180 Activate 181 DS field 180 DSCP 180 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 182 Network example 180 PHB 180 DiffServ Differentiated Services 128 DiffServ Code Point DSCP 128 DiffServ marking rule 128 Double tagged Frames 33 138 DS Differentiated Services 180 DS field 128 DS See Differentiated Services DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 182 Service level 180 What it does 180 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 180 DVLAN Table 288 DVMRP Autonomous system 34 174 Default timer setting 177 Error message 176 Graft 175 How it works 174 Implementation 174 Probe 175 Prune 175 Report 175 Setup 175 Terminology 175 Threshold 176 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 34 174 Dynamic link aggregation 110 E Egress port 93 Ethernet broadcast address 232 Ethern
326. y one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 69 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 7 Status Port Details continued
327. y used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Chapter 7 Basic Setting 78 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide Table 10 Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 7 7 IP Setup 7 7 1 Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains IP Interfaces The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 On the switch as a layer 3 device an IP address is not bound to any physical ports Since each IP address on the switch must be in a separate subnet the configured IP address is also known as IP interface or routing domain In addition this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without additional routers You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for the domains do not overlap To change the IP address of the switch in a routing domain simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet 79
328. you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 144 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 22 1 1 on page 144 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save the settings Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete All and click Delete to remove all entries from the table Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table Chapter 22 Multicast 152 GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide 22 5 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group
329. ys Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 157 Chapter 23 Static Route GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 24 RIP This chapter shows you how to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol 24 1 Overview RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exchange routing information with other routers The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives Incoming the switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Outgoing the switch will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the switch will not send any
330. ys known SSH hosts information key Displays internal SSH public and private lt rsal rsa dsa gt key information session Displays current SSH session s system information Displays general system information time Displays current system time and date timesync Displays time server information trunk Displays link aggregation information vlan Displays the status of all VLANs vlan id Displays the status of the specified VLAN vlan stacking Displays VLAN stacking settings vlaniq gvrp Displays GVRP settings port isolation Displays port isolation settings ssh lt 1 2 gt lt user dest Connects to an SSH server with the ip gt specified SSH version command lt gt Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version and addition commands to be executed on the server traceroute lt ip host name gt in Determines the path a packet takes toa band out of device band vlan lt vlan id ttl lt 1 255 gt wait lt 1 60 gt queries lt 1 10 gt help Displays help information for this command write memory Saves current configuration to the configuration file the switch is currently using lt index gt Saves current configuration to the specified configuration file on the switch 40 9 3 General Configuration Mode The following table lists the commands in Configuration or Config mode Table 95 Command Summary Configuration Mode COMMAND DESCRIPTION admin password
331. z DSCP o TOS o Forwarding No change C Discard the packet C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change C Setthe packet s 802 1 priority C Send the packetto priority queue C Replace the 802 1 priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change C Setthe packet s TOS field C Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1 priority value C Setthe Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Action Outgoing Send the packetto the mirror port Send the packetto the egress port Send the matching frames broadcast or DLF multicast marked for dropping orto be sentto the CPU to the egress port Setthe packet s VLAN ID Metering Enable M Drop the packet Change the DSCP value Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Out of profile action Add Cancel Cleer 133 Chapter 19 Policy Rule GS 4012F 4024 User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or

ZyXEL GS-4012F/4024 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents